JP2021122482A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing the gambling property from becoming excessively high.SOLUTION: Performance control means can execute performance control on the basis of control information that is transmitted from game control means and can specify whether or not a game state is a high imparting state. Suggestion performance execution means, as a suggestion performance, can execute a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from specific performance identification information is temporarily lowered to a first low visibility state and then lowered to a second low visibility state having lower visibility than that in the first low visibility state, by the display of effective display. Notification performance execution means, as a notification performance, can execute a performance in which the performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible. The suggestion performance execution means can execute the suggestion performance even when the specific performance identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific performance identification information is not temporarily stopped, can continuously display the effective display for a predetermined period after a predetermined timing has passed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-28

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be controlled to a normal state and a special state that is more likely to be controlled to be more advantageous than the normal state.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that is controlled over a predetermined number of variable display times in a high probability state (probability change state), which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state that is more advantageous than a normal state (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-8350

However, in Patent Document 1, a large amount of advantageous states (big hit states) controlled to the high probability state (probability change state) are repeatedly generated by the end of the high probability state (probability change state). There is a problem that a game ball, which is a game medium, may be given in a short period of time, and there is a fear that the player's gambling spirit may be excessively agitated.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing an excessive gaming value from being imparted in a short period of time and an excessive increase in gambling. The purpose.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a normal state and a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state. And
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, adjustment means (for example, FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-21) for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
With
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 The part where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball ejection state specification command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
When the end condition is satisfied, the updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
Moreover,
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a normal state and a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state. And
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, adjustment means (for example, FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-21) for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
With
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 The part where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball ejection state specification command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
When the end condition is satisfied, the updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
Moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means A to B. Conventionally, it is possible to execute a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect identification information) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-131876 in a gaming machine, and a pseudo-continuous symbol (specification) is performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. There are some that can execute a pseudo continuous effect (specific effect) including a temporary stop of the effect identification information) and a revariable display.

However, since no effect is executed when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, it is not possible to raise the player's expectation that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. There is a problem that the uplifting feeling of the player cannot be enhanced.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the expectation of a player and enhancing the uplifting feeling of a player. ..

The gaming machine of means A is
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means B is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the presence or absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a figure which shows the update example of the 1st hold storage display area and the 2nd hold storage display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display control timer and the movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach α1 off and the super reach α2 off. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 off and the super reach β2 off. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of the movable body suggestion movement, and the image enlargement ratio in each enlarged display period. (A) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion suggestion effect, and (B) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode up to the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine of the feature part 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the variable display time of each fluctuation pattern, and a ball ejection state flag. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing in the pachinko game machine of the feature part 162SG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko game machine of the feature part 162SG. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a ball ejection state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a ball ejection state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the progress state of a big hit and the opening and closing state of a big prize opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball ejection state flag value and each period in a jackpot state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the hold memory of the jackpot (excluding the probability variation jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the hold memory of the outlier. Is. (A) is a diagram showing a first reserved storage display area and a second reserved storage display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an update example of the first reserved storage display area and the second reserved storage display area. .. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the notice production type determination table A to C. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for deviation which is selected according to the value of the ball ejection state flag. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the time saving loss in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the operation of the 2nd movable body. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the content of a variable category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a jackpot hold memory, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a lost hold memory. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. This is a variable display timing chart that executes a pseudo-continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of each production period and production content in pseudo-continuous production. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. It is a figure which shows the output mode of the sound output from a speaker. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop. It is a figure which shows the display mode of each image in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of the change of the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols in the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the temporary stop notification effect period. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in the image display apparatus in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transparency of a concentrated line and an effect image in a modification. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the image display apparatus in the variable display which executes the pseudo continuous effect in the modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the normal state and the advantageous state than the normal state. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to (low accuracy and high base state)).
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, the update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and the predetermined numerical data are the second values. Occasionally, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, the CPU 103 ejects balls in the ball ejection state determination process. By setting the state flag value to "1" or "2", the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the jackpot game are extended).
When the end condition is satisfied, the updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, the adjustment for reducing the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, it is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being added and the gambling property from being excessively increased.

The gaming machine of the second aspect of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a big hit).
The adjusting means has a variable display period in which the variable display period executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is the variable display period executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2" (first high ball ejection state or second). The part where the special figure variable display time in each fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (when the ball ejection state is low). ),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by lengthening the variable display period, the time interval of the advantageous state that occurs when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be lengthened, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the time interval can be lengthened. The game value granting speed can be reduced without reducing the game value granted in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
The advantageous state is the grantable period during which the game value can be granted (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the period of each round game in which the large winning opening is open) and the grant at which the game value cannot be granted. Including the impossible period (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period in which the large winning opening is closed) are included.
The adjusting means controls the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, and the advantageous state is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-21, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball ejection status flag is adjusted to be longer than the non-grantable period of. The part where the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending period are set longer during the jackpot game than when it is "0"),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by lengthening the non-grantable period during which the game value is not given, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the fourth form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third forms.
Whether the advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, probability variation jackpot B) or a second advantageous state (for example, probability variation jackpot A) in which the magnitude of the game value given is larger than that of the first advantageous state. (For example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process of determining a jackpot type (step 162SGS154) in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 11-16).
In the adjusting means, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the ratio at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means is such that the predetermined numerical data is the first value. At times, the first advantageous state is adjusted to be higher than the ratio at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-1, the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state. In this case, as a jackpot type, the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot A is lowered and the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot B is increased as compared with the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, the first advantageous state in which the magnitude of the game value to be given is small is easily determined, so that the predetermined numerical value data is the second value. Since the magnitude of the game value given at the time can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the fifth form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth forms.
In the adjusting means, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the ratio at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means is the first value. Is adjusted so as to be higher than the ratio at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means (for example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-2, the big hit is higher than the low ball output state in the high ball output state. The part that increases the rate of determining the type as a non-probability change jackpot, and the part that increases the rate of winning the fall lottery in the high ball output state than in the low ball output state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the end of the advantageous period is easily determined and the normal state is easily controlled, so that a continuous advantageous state is generated through the special state. Since the number of times can be reduced, as a result, the speed at which the game value is given when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be reduced.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The end condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state that occurred in the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data was updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reached the end determination number. (For example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-3, the first high output is performed on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high output state or the second high output state. The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball output state to the low ball output state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be completed when the advantageous state of the number of end determinations occurs in the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display and controlling the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a big hit).
The end condition is that the number of variable displays executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the end determination number (for example, after the determination). The value "100" set as the remaining number of variable display becomes "0" by executing the variable display 100 times).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be completed when the variable display of the end determination number is executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of the eighth form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh forms.
The end condition is that the magnitude of the game value used for the game after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches the magnitude of the end determination. (For example, as shown in the modified example 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1", the game ball or the out opening that has won each winning opening during the period of the consecutive villa state The part where the value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of game balls that have entered reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the adjustment is terminated when the magnitude of the game value used for the game reaches the magnitude of the end determination after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value. can do.

The gaming machine of the 9th form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 8th forms.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the initialization means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 is shown in FIGS. 11-11) for initializing the stored contents of the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. When the game control main process shown is executed, based on the fact that the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), the process of step S6a and step S6b is executed).
With
When the stored contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set in the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-11, the CPU 103 performs the step S6b. The part that sets "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state as the value of the ball ejection status flag in the process),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of the form 10 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped is provided.
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, the CPU 103 recovers the predetermined numerical data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (for example, FIG. 11). When the game control main process shown in -11 is executed, if the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) including the update process of the ball ejection status flag by the backup data is executed. Therefore, if a high ball output state occurs when a power failure occurs, the ball output state is restored to a high ball output state, and if a low ball output state occurs when a power failure occurs, the ball output state is restored to a low ball output state).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is the second value, the adjustment can be continued at the time of recovery from the power failure.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth forms.
Notifying means capable of notifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, in the ball ejection state determination process, the ball ejection state flag is set in the process of step S162SG06. A portion that starts lighting the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 in the process of step 162SG08 after the value is set to "1").
It is characterized by that.
It can be recognized that the adjustment is performed because the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the form 12 of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and
A light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting units whose light emission is controlled by the game control means (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display 20, a high ball output state notification LED 162SG071). And with
The notification is performed by causing the light emitting unit to emit light (for example, a portion that notifies the high ball ejection state by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, notification can be performed by light emission control common to other light emitting units by the game control means.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to the twelfth forms.
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
With
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 The part where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball ejection state specification command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 14th form of the feature unit 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 13th forms.
A specific effect that can suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach effect) and a notice effect that announces the execution of the specific effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) can be executed. An execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided.
The effect executing means limits the execution of the advance notice effect in a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, FIG. 11-). As shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the remaining variable display number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number in the process of step 162SGS242b of the pre-reading advance notice setting process, and the remaining variable display number after determination is determined. When the number of read-aheads is less than or equal to the limit (step 162SGS242b; Y), the part where the read-ahead notice effect is not executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from becoming unsuitable because the adjustment is not executed due to the predetermined numerical data being updated from the second value to the first value.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The normal map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (although the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting the control circuit of the game control microcomputer 100 or the like into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of the power supply monitoring circuit, the watchdog timer built-in IC, and the system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the display result for the first special figure regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 109SG)
Next, the feature unit 109SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

As a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), a conventional gaming machine can notify an effect result by an operation of a movable body (execution of a specific effect) and can output an effect sound. Some are equipped with various speakers (sound output means).

As the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed by repeatedly operating the movable body in a period before the specific effect is executed. It is conceivable that the player pays attention to whether or not the specific effect is executed by executing the effect. Further, as such a gaming machine, the repetitive operation of the movable body as a suggestion effect is completed before a predetermined period before the specific effect, and the type of the effect sound output from the speaker is changed before and after the predetermined period ( It is conceivable to improve the game entertainment by changing the type of production sound output from the speaker), but it is possible that the type of production sound output from these speakers has changed before and after the predetermined period. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to be recognized by the movement of the movable body.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy to recognize that the type of effect sound has changed before and after a predetermined period.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the gaming board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. ..

The movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction. The third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

Further, the movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the feature unit 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is a retracted position which is a lower position of the image display device 5 by being driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421. (See FIG. 10-3 (A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3 (B)), the effect above the suggested position and also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to the position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are driven by the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423, and are retracted positions that are lower positions of the image display device 5 (FIG. 10). -3 (A)), the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the effect position can be moved to the left-right proximity position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

In the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 and the first movable body 109SG401 are located at the suggested positions, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the retracted positions. The second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the effect position. The state of being located close to the left and right sides of the movable body unit 109SG400 is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", a judgment result of the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change), and a small hit as the judgment result at the time of winning. .. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the feature unit 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 109SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 109SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 109SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 109SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-7 (B). In the feature unit 109SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). .. In addition, the jackpot game state by "probability variation jackpot C" and "non-probability variation jackpot" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is a probability variation big hit, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. , So-called consecutive villa state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 109SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and so on are provided. It may be provided.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 109SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In this feature unit 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot).

If the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation patterns are set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -2 (Variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) To decide from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have the same number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, while PB1-2 and PB1. The number of determination values assigned to -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is different. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 2 for PB1-1, 45 for PB1-2, 150 for PB1-3, 300 for PB1-4, and 500 for PB1-5. Each value is assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, there are 2 determination values for PB1-1, 30 determination values for PB1-2, 135 determination values for PB1-3, 315 determination values for PB1-4, and 515 determination values for PB1-5. Each is assigned. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 and β2 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1-4. Alternatively, since it is determined to be PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. do. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach time reduction), PA2-1 (normal reach loss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 loss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 loss fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 109SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of the super reach α1 (variable display of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in the feature unit 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40. It is a second, and it is a variable display that executes a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A as the reach effect of the super reach. The variable display of the super reach α2 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of the super reach, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is produced. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of super reach, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. Is a variable display that executes.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature unit 109SG is set to the highest jackpot expectation of super reach β2, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super reach α1, normal reach, non-reach, and the jackpot expectation is set higher in this order (big hit expectation in each variable display in this feature unit 109SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super reach α1 > Normal reach> Non-reach).

In other words, paying attention to the variable display of the super reach, in this feature unit 109SG, which of the ally character A and the ally character B displayed as the battle effect (the reach effect of the super reach) is the battle effect (super). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect) is the enemy character A or the enemy character B.

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10. Is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 109SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Has been done. The effect control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 109SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 109SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 109SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. The reception command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A of the feature unit 109SG, a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5, and the first is displayed. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the command buffer 109SG194A received at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 10-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS102; N). Step 109 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS105; N). Step 109 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 109 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the start winning is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 109SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-11) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 109SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines each determination as the random value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6. 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 109SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 109SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 109SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 10-9, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation patterns within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the fourth symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the fifth symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 109 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and the step Proceed to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each fluctuation pattern judgment table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination values including the random number MR3 is determined (step 109SGS138). In this feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

In step 109SGS222, when the receiving command is the first start opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or in step 109SGS224, the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226. When the receive command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), when the receive command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228. In the case (109SGS228; Y), when the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the reception command is vacant in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 109SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this feature unit 162SGS234, when the reception command is the first ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "0". If the reception command is the second ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "1". If the reception command is the third ball ejection state specification command, it is determined that the ball ejection state is the second high ball ejection state, and the value of the ball ejection state flag for production is set to "2". Set (update) to.

In the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, the received command is used when the start prize is won. An example of a form in which the reception command buffer 109SG194A is sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command, the hold storage number notification command is used. If a timer for waiting for reception is set and the hold storage number notification command is not received before the timer goes out, the entry hold storage that has not received the hold storage number notification command will be described later. It may be set out of the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and holds the hold storage (entry) in which the hold display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). When there is no hold memory for which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and when there is hold memory for which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated. Further, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed depends on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, the content of the process data of the variable display being executed may be referred to, and it may be determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (hold display flag is set). It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the unset entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a miss or a jackpot. When it is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (symbol designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). ..

When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, when the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold memory display is displayed. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation that it will be a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display pattern α or the white star that displays the hold memory display in the white square (◇) by always deciding the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is variable even when it is a big hit. A case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined as in the case where the display result is “off”.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 109SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a "non-reach" variation pattern category, and if it is C601H, it is a "super reach" variation pattern category. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 109SG005U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) in a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-16, when the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "non". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than in the case of "reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Further, when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α. Alternatively, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable big hit)", when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "big hit" and the jackpot type will be "probability variable jackpot". Since the ratio is increased, the player's expectation can be increased.

After the execution of step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 109 SGS249).

After the execution of step 109SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 109SGS249 (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS249). 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, as described above, even when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry is also entered. After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift are shown in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 10-17. , When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", the display mode is "☆". It is displayed in. If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is a holding display of the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆", the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is displayed. Is displayed. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the hold storage display is also displayed in a predetermined shift direction (in the feature unit 109SG, the screen is displayed) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory each time the variable display is executed. Shift toward the center of.

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, the feature unit 109SG determines in step 109SGS242 whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of starting winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 109SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 109SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Further, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 converts the variable display image data including the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols into the VRAM each time the first time elapses. The writing and display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIGS. 10-20).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; Y), the second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control CPU 120 of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. Take control. As a result, the movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After the execution of step 109SGS288, or when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag during the effect display process (step). The value corresponding to S172) is set, and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is set to -1 (step 109SGS303c).

After the execution of step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variablely displayed (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

In step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 109SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer is timer-out (109SGS309g). When the movable body control timer is out of time (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109 SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set again in the movable body control timer), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not the variable display of the super reach (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable body control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. Proceed to step 109SGS310 without proceeding.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109 SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during the variable display including the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. Image data of the screen to be displayed after the lapse of time) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

If the variable display control timer is not timered out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timered out (step 109SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards or the like. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 109SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 in the feature unit 109SG will be described. The effect mode of the variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, when the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is started, the first enlarged display period , The character image displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of the super reach α1, the reach effect of the ally character A and the enemy character A, and the super reach α2 If there is, the enlarged display of the ally character A and the enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the normal display magnification (1 times) to the display magnification m1 at a constant speed, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The image is magnified at a constant speed up to a magnification of m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is magnified at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period elapses. ..

In the feature unit 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. Is the smallest. That is, in the feature unit 109SG, the enlargement speed of the character image is set to be the fastest in the first enlargement display period and the slowest in the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: 1st enlarged display period> 2nd enlarged display period> 3rd enlarged display period). In the feature unit 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" means that the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is large.

After that, in the feature unit 109SG, the period T2 is the combined period of the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect), the third enlarged display period, and the character image. A period including a predetermined period for maintaining the display magnification at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the period T3 ends and the variable display ends. As an effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to a close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to each position. The movable body motion effect A for moving to the retracted position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is out of alignment, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the detachment notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. For these periods T2 to period T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3).

Further, during the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the effect image is also displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion effect A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body extends over the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). A movable body motion suggestion effect A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are imaged from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over the period T4 as a part of the above-mentioned movable body movement effect A. It moves (spreads) toward the edge of the display device 5. The absolute value of the velocity V2 is larger than the absolute value of the velocity V1. That is, the movable body motion effect A in the feature unit 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves at a higher speed than the movable body motion suggestion effect A.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the light emission of the movable body LED109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable LED 109SG 495 has the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) and the middle of the period T3 (more accurately). Causes the movable body LED109SG495 to emit light at brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable LED 109SG 495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, over the period T4.

In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of production sounds such as BGM, SE (sound effect) of music, motion suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound can be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The type of sound that is output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. Output is stopped. That is, the output of the BGM in the reach effect is executed from the start timing of the reach effect to the end timing of the period T2 and over the period T4.

Further, SE (sound effect) is a directing sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. .. That is, the output of SE in the reach effect is executed over the entire reach effect.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. That is, the motion suggestion sound is output only in the period T2, which is the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and is not output in other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body operation effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only in the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion effect A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output in other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, when the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2 is started, the first enlarged display period, the first The character image displayed on the image display device 5 during the 2 enlarged display period and the 3rd enlarged display period (if the reach effect of the super reach β1, the ally character B and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach β2) Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

After that, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, the light emitting mode of the movable LED 109SG495, the output of the BGM, SE, the operation suggestion sound, and the jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in FIG. The description of the same embodiment as the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 shown in 21 and FIG. 10-22 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is variable from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the respective retracted positions. The movable body motion effect B to be moved (changes the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is out of alignment, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed. The movable body effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4 in the same manner as the movable body effect A and the disconnection notification effect described above.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) is extended. The movable body motion suggestion effect B for repeatedly moving (reciprocating) the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is executed. The period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect B is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3 (). Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3> period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period are movable bodies. While the motion suggestion effect is executed, the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Further, in the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period has the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the third. The enlargement display period is set to the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), when the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B are compared, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. The 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. Is not moving, whereas the movable body motion suggestion effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 is an effect of repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggested position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B are compared, the movable body motion effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body moved to the effect position (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and a plurality of movable bodies 109SG402L are moved. This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S diffuses from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effected position. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are diffused from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion effect A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, a display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), a while after the variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 is started, , The decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period elapses in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (C). ) And FIG. 10-28 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIG. 10-27 (D) and FIG. (See FIG. 10-30 (A)) If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (E) and 10). -32 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (F) and 10-. 34 (A)).

At the start of the reach effect of these super reaches, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are the upper left and right upper ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative symbols are temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach α1, is approached, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), allies The display of the moving image in which the character A attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (C) to 10-28 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (D) to 10-28 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A which have become these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (E) to 10-28 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 over a predetermined period. Display with. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (H) and 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. NS.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body is first movable after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) as the reach effect of the super reach α2 is shown in FIG. 10-30 (C). As described above, the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (D) to 10-30 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-31 (G) to 10-31 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. NS.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body is first movable after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (C). Then, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (C) to 10-32 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (D) and 10-32 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (G) to 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body is first movable after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an outlier notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C). Then, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (C) to 10-34 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B at the center of the image display device 5 is used as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in duplicate with the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body is first movable after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an outlier notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified.
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 10-35, the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B enlarges the images of the ally character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since the display and the effect of the movable body motion effect B by the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the effect of the effect in the enlarged display period can be improved by changing the enlargement speed of the image of each character between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation effect can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period is slower than that of the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed is Since the enlargement speed is further slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed of the third enlarged display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this. (3) The enlargement speed of the enlarged display period may be the fastest, the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period, the player to the reach effect by executing the pre-reading notice effect. It is possible to prevent the attention of the person from being reduced. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over the entire execution period of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notice is not limited to this. The period for restricting the execution of the effect may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading notice effect is not executed during the reach effect as a form for restricting the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. , During the reach effect, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35. In addition, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5. That is, since the visibility of the reach effect effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the operation status of the first movable body 109SG401, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 is used as the movable body operation suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether it is an operation or an operation as a movable body operation effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the effect image of the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed, the BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed. Since the BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401. Since the period T3 is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion effect is the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for it, and the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect becomes longer than the execution period of the movable body motion effect in the reach effect of the suggested target. The decrease can also be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation effect or the detachment notification effect, the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off. During the period when is off, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body is operated. In the motion effect B, all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether the movement is also an action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1 and the movable body operation effect is produced. Since the movable body LED109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, the brightness of the movable body LED109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body operation effect is being executed. , The game entertainment during the execution of the movable body movement effect can also be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect image (the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B) is displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, the effect image of the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made to stand out, and the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are faster than the speed V1 in the image display device 5. Since it is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion effect A, and these Since the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden in the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the detachment notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is a movable body motion effect or an out-of-order notification effect.

Although the feature portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , An example in which the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the enlarged display start timing of the effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect is set before the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating operation of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect is performed. Can raise the attention of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the magnified display period and the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the magnified display period are substantially the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect. And by displaying an effect image or the like, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be different. By doing so, after the enlarged display period ends, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the image display device 5 can display the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, depending on the progress of the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character executed as the reach effect. The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, it corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies. The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

Further, when the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, the effect of the explosion according to the movement of these movable bodies is possible. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image having an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, thus improving the game entertainment. can.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the ally character and the enemy character are visually recognized in the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect. Although the form that does not change the sex is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body motion suggestion effect and the movable body motion effect or the disconnection notification after the end of the enlarged display period are completed. In the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, so that the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character is reduced. You may let me. Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed (when the variable display result is a big hit), the contrast and the brightness in the image display device 5 are changed from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state, which is further lower. The visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in visibility of the ally character and the enemy character in the image display device 5. At the time of executing the movable body effect, attention to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R can be raised.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-5, when the movable body motion effect is being executed, The image display device 5 may display different effect images. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is calculated from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be more. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, so that the game interest at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, while the image display device 5 displays the movable body motion suggestion effect. As the body motion effect compatible image, an image different from the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 can display the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image, the display period of the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the display period of the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are set. It may be different. By doing so, the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are combined with the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). It is possible to display in an appropriate period corresponding to (whether it is the execution of the movable body motion effect).

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body, the visibility of the image corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body may be lowered by lowering the contrast and the brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the player's attention can be raised to the movable body motion effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect.

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the speaker 8L8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body operation suggestion effect, and the image display device 5 When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the speaker 8L8R may output the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect. By doing so, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the time of executing the movable body motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed or the movable body motion effect is being executed.

Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 is movable from the timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. The display of the image corresponding to the body movement effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the movable body movement effect is started during the reach effect of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase the attention to the movable body motion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, in the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are directed toward the first movable body 109SG401 in the image display device 5. Although the embodiment in which the display of moving at the speed V1 is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to the speed of the first movable body 109SG401. The speed is changed to a low speed (changes the speed V1 to a low speed) as it approaches. The speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A may be set to a speed higher than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, so that the game entertainment is improved. can.

Further, the feature unit 109SG outputs a motion suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, and notifies the jackpot of the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of outputting sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. ..

Further, in the case where a plurality of sounds can be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the motion suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound is started. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect or the movable body motion effect is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and can be made according to the output timing. Since these motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the output timing of the operation suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the motion suggestion sound is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG 401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first movable body 109SG401 is reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. , The first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG 401 is made to stand by at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. May be good. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the effect position, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, it is possible to evoke a player's expectation that the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is set between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-20, update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body). Although the mode in which the movement control of the 109SG402R) is executed based on the control timer is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body are not limited to this. In addition to the movement control of the above, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

When executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the LED lighting control, and the output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, for the effect control every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (S73 to S77 are executed every 1 ms in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8), the effect image update control is performed every 33 ms, the movable body movement control is performed every 1 ms, and the LED. The lighting control of the above may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the effect sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, for the third movable body) is always performed. Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, it is possible to preferably execute the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of light emitting modes of the movable body LED109SG495 are used. The ratio of the movable body LED 109SG495 controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which mode the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed as the movable body motion suggestion effect A in any of the modes. The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state may be different depending on the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature unit 109SG performs a reciprocating motion (movable body motion suggestion effect) between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG 401 during the third enlarged display period. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating operation between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is executed even in the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a big hit, the third enlargement can be performed by enabling the reciprocating operation between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the third enlarged display period. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment suggesting the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B by repeatedly moving the body (movable body motion suggestion effect B) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these are specified. The execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in an aspect other than the display of the image of the above and the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED109SG495) as shown in the feature portion 109SG, the movable body operation effect A or the movable body operation depends on the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may suggest the execution of the effect B.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B in the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed (see FIGS. 10-28 (D) and 10-30 (D)) in a reduced state is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 10-28 (C)). And the timing of FIG. 10-30 (C)), the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started.

In this way, when the image display device 5 starts displaying the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S from a timing before the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B is lowered, the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started. By increasing the transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the ally character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be easier to see than when the contrast is lowered.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (G) and the like, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 and displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a part of the effect image is invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image is displayed when the movable body motion effect is executed. The explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body motion effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, so that all the other effect images are invisible.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is not limited to this. The timing may be other than during the reach production of Super Reach. For example, as a modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A), 10-36 (B), and 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (H), a combination of decorative symbols is used. It may be possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from the reach to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (B), the movable body motion suggestion effect is first started after the reach is reached, and in the image display device 5, the reach effect to be executed after that is highly expected (big hit). Reach effect (for example, reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) and low expectation (big hit game state) Which of the reach effects (for example, the reach effects with lower expectations than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) As a branching effect for notifying whether or not to branch to, the image of the character with the eyes closed is displayed. As the branching effect, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (C), during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expected reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character opening his eyes. That is, in the branching effect, the high-expected reach effect is not executed (the low-expected reach effect is executed) because the character displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened without opening the eyes. Be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), the low-expected reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with a high degree of expectation, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (F) to 10-37 (H). It is notified that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed when the character is opening his eyes. At this time, the movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body movement effect and the branch effect are completed, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

That is, the movable body motion effect may be executed as an effect of notifying that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state as illustrated in the feature unit 109SG, but it is informed that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed. It may be executed as an effect to be performed (an effect to notify that the degree of expectation to be controlled by the jackpot game state is high).

In the present modification 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-37 (C), the character in the state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed in the image display device 5 as a branching effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character in a state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branching effect, the character is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the character opens his eyes.

As described above, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit during the reach effect of the super reach. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch of whether a low-expected reach effect or a high-expected reach effect is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is a character image (the first specific image is the image of the character with the eyes closed, the second specific image is the image of the character with the eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. Corresponds to the above-mentioned images such as concentrated lines.

As shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as an effect for notifying that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, the movable body motion effect is executed. Although a mode in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed before the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion effect does not have to be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion effect may be different between the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed and the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed (the rate at which the high-expected reach effect is executed is different). (Explanation of feature 162SG)
Next, the feature portion 162SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the above-mentioned basic configuration, and the same configuration with the same reference numerals as the basic configuration is described here. The description will be omitted, and the feature configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 having the feature section 162SG different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the basic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 11-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the ordinary symbol display 20 are together with the predetermined game board 2. A variable display time extension, which will be described later, for adjusting the number of game balls paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to the determination of a high ball output state at the lower left position of the game area, which is the position. A high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is provided so as to be visible to the player to notify by lighting that the adjustment or the jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed.

These high ball output status notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20, and are connected to the main board 11 (microcomputer for game control). According to 100), lighting / extinguishing is controlled by executing a ball ejection state determination process (see FIG. 11-13) described later, and the lighting / extinguishing control cycle is the first special symbol. The cycle is the same as the control cycle of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature unit 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed by determining the high ball ejection state by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071. Can be confirmed (understood).

FIG. 11-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 162SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determined result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command 96XXH is a ball ejection state designation command for designating the determination status of the ball ejection state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the ball ejection state designation command, as shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), different EXT data are set according to the determination status of the ball ejection state determination. As a specific example, the command 9600H is a command for specifying the ball ejection state 1 corresponding to the low ball ejection state that is not determined to be the high ball ejection state, and the command 9601H is the number of first determinations (5) for the number of consecutive villas of the jackpot. The command 9602H is used as the command 9602H, and the number of consecutive villas in the jackpot is the second. 2 The command is to specify the ball ejection state 3 corresponding to the determination state determined to be the second high ball ejection state that is the number of determinations (10 times) or more.

The command 97XXH is a command for notifying the number of consecutive villas after the judgment, which is the number of times of the big hit state that occurred in the determined high ball output state after the determination of the high ball output state, and corresponds to the number of consecutive villas after the judgment. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive villas after the determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command 98XXH is a command for notifying the remaining variable display count after the determination, which is the variable display count (including the variable display count after the end of the high base state) executed after the determination of the high ball output state, and is variable after the determination. By setting the EXT data corresponding to the remaining number of display times, the variable remaining number of display times after determination is specified on the effect control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning judgment result, a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability), and a small hit. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 11-3, in the feature unit 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. 11-9, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 11-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 162SG uses a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. A separate display result determination table may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 has a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Table.

In the display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 162SG, a special figure is shown depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 162SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained as "big hit" than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the jackpot game state when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in this feature unit 162SG) (about 1 in this feature unit 162SG). / 30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is in the probability variation state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the determination data becomes high.

Further, FIG. 11-4 (B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 2 has a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 162SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), a special figure is provided. A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "small hit" in the small hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 11-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 162SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-5 (B). In the feature unit 162SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by the "probability change big hit C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 162SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this feature unit 162SG, when it is determined to be "probability variation big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 11-6). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 162SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In addition, the jackpot that occurred in the low base state may be described as the first jackpot (first hit), and the jackpot that occurred in the time saving state (high accuracy high base state and low accuracy high base state) may be referred to as the consecutive villa jackpot (ream). It may be described as (per villa). In addition, the period between the big hit state (first hit) and the subsequent control to the normal state is also called the consecutive villa period (advantageous period). In this feature unit 162SG, even if the probability variation jackpot C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot. Therefore, the probability variation jackpot C is not set as the first jackpot (first hit), but the jackpot in the probability variation state after the probability variation jackpot C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic jackpot C is set as the first jackpot (first hit), and the probabilistic jackpot C is set as the first jackpot. The later period of high accuracy and low base state may be included in the consecutive villa period (advantageous period).

Although it is not carried out in this feature unit 162SG, instead of the probability variation jackpot C, a sudden time saving jackpot that makes the gaming state after the jackpot a low probability high base state may be provided. Suddenly, the time-saving jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Further, for example, when a time saving symbol (for example, 137 stop symbol or a stop symbol dedicated to time saving that is not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as the stop symbol, a round game for opening the special variable winning ball device 7 is executed. It may be controlled to the high base state without any need, and when it is directly controlled from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive villa period (advantageous period). Will be.

In other words, the consecutive villa period (advantageous period) is the period from when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) to when it is subsequently controlled to the normal state. Is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 11-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG. In this feature unit 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 162SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 11-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 162SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 162SG. In this feature unit 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-7, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. Is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B differ in the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1 and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, when the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than the case where the variable display result is the non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since it is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 162SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. The variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach out-of-reach variation pattern) using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A. do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. The fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach loss) using the fluctuation pattern determination table C. do.

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 162SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the ball ejection state will be described with reference to FIG. 11-8. The ball ejection state flag in FIG. 11-8 is a flag updated by the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13, which will be described later, and is set to "0" when the ball ejection state is low, and the first It is a flag that "1" is set when it is in a high ball ejection state and "2" is set when it is in a second high ball ejection state, and the ball ejection at that time depends on the value of the ball ejection state flag. It is possible to identify whether the state is a low ball ejection state, a first high ball ejection state, or a second high ball ejection state.

The variable display time of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the low ball ejection state in which "0" is set in the ball ejection status flag is the same as the variable display time of each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 11-6, and the ball ejection status flag is set to "0". The variable display time corresponding to the case where "0" is set in the state flag is not extended, but the variable pattern corresponding to the first high ball ejection state in which "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag is variable. As for the display time, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach out-of-reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4), which frequently appears, is the non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-) corresponding to "0" in the ball ejection state flag. When the variable display time longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern in 4) is set and extended, and "1" is set in the ball ejection status flag, the extended variable display time is not set. By executing the variable display of the out-of-reach, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second high ball ejection state in which "2" is set in the ball ejection state flag is the non-reach outlier (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and the normal reach, which frequently appear. The variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the miss (PA2-1) and the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) is the non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and the normal reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) corresponding to "1" in the ball ejection status flag. PA2-1) and the variable display time that is longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot are set and extended, and if "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag, these are extended. The average variable display time is further lengthened by executing the variable display of the non-reach deviation, the normal reach deviation, and the normal reach jackpot of the variable display time.

The extended variable display time is 1 second in the first high ball ejection state in which the ball ejection state flag is "1" for the non-reach PA1-1 which is a non-shortened fluctuation pattern, and the ball ejection state flag is "1". In the second high ball ejection state where the status flag is "2", it is 1.5 seconds, and for the non-reach PA1-2 to non-reach PA1-4 which is the variation pattern of shortening, the ball ejection status flag is "1". It is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball ejection state, and 1.0 second in the second high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "2", which is a variation pattern of reach PA2. Regarding -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "1", and in the second high ball ejection state where the ball ejection state flag is "2". 5 seconds.

The length of the variable display time to be extended shown in FIG. 11-8 is an example, and an extension different from these lengths may be performed. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than the extension in the first high ball output state.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach out-of-reach, which is frequently executed due to the high determination rate, and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach, which is frequently executed as compared with super reach, are extended. The average variable display time can be efficiently lengthened, and the data capacity of the reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to the production due to the long variable display time, can be stored by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, for all fluctuation patterns, "1 second" is set as a predetermined extension time. The variable display time may be uniformly added and extended, and for these extended periods, a common effect using common effect data may be executed in each variation pattern.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, in the first high ball ejection state in which the ball ejection state flag is "1", only the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern is extended, and the ball ejection state flag is "2". In the second high ball output state, the average variable display time is further increased by increasing the variation pattern to be extended so that the reach fluctuation pattern is also extended when a certain second high ball output state is reached. Although it is possible to extend the ball efficiently, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the ball ejection state flag is "2", the variation pattern in which the ball ejection state flag is extended at "1" It may be possible to prevent the control load related to the extension from being excessively increased by extending the length further so that the fluctuation pattern to be extended does not change according to the ball ejection state. ..

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11-8, not only the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive villa period, but also the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 will be described later. In this way, these consecutive villa periods (advantageous period) have ended so that even if a big hit occurs again with a small number of variable impressions after the consecutive villa period (advantageous period) ends and is controlled to the normal state. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the variation patterns of the non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3 corresponding to the normal state are also extended so that the variable display in the normal state at the time of the normal state can be extended. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is the gaming state in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive villa period, may be extended. ..

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 162SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, for example, a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-9. Is provided. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 11-9 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 162SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 162SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 162SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 162SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 162SG153, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A, the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 162SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 162SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 11-1 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 11-10 (A). A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 162SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 162SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 162SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 162SG194. The reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 162SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A of the feature unit 162SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 9) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating the above and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A of the feature unit 162SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is secured for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (Fig. 11-22), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a number of reserved memories, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. If the notification command is not received within the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower part of the image display device 5, and the first is displayed. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode can be displayed in the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-11. As shown in FIGS. 11-11, the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG also executes almost the same process as the game control main process in the basic configuration of FIG. 4, but features of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG. The points are that the contents of the recovery process of S4 are different, and that the process of step S6b relating to the initial setting of the ball ejection state flag is added in addition to the initialization process of step S6a.

In the restoration process of step S4 of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG, a process of restoring the ball ejection state flag to the state before the power failure is executed. As will be described later, in the power interruption process of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature unit 162SG shown in FIG. 11-12, the backup data stored when the power failure occurs includes the power failure occurrence. The data of the flag value of the ball ejection status flag at the time is included.

As a specific recovery status of the ball ejection status flag, when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state when a power failure occurs, the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. Is set and the value of the ball ejection status flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball ejection state when a power failure occurs, the ball ejection status flag is set to "1" by the recovery process, and when a power failure occurs. When the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2" corresponding to the second ball ejection state, "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag by the recovery process. That is, by the restoration process of S4, the value before the occurrence of the power failure is set in the value of the ball ejection state flag, and the ball ejection state before the power failure is restored.

The backup data described above also includes data on the number of consecutive villas after judgment and the remaining number of variable display after judgment, which will be described later, and the data on the number of consecutive villas after judgment and the remaining number of variable display after judgment are also in S4. The recovery process restores the data at the time of power failure.

In this way, the value of the ball ejection status flag is restored to the value before the occurrence of the power failure by the restoration process in step S4, and the data of the number of consecutive villas after the determination and the remaining number of variable displays after the determination are restored. Even if a power failure occurs in the first ball ejection state or the second ball ejection state in which the ball ejection speed is adjusted, the adjustment of the ball ejection speed is not completed by the electrical interruption, and after the power failure is restored. Will continue.

On the other hand, since the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed, and the initial setting (including the initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive villas) at the time of turning on the power is executed. Later, the ball ejection state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball ejection state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power is turned on when the power failure recovery condition is not satisfied (when the power supply other than the power failure recovery is started), "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball ejection state, is set in the ball ejection state flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball ejection speed from being improperly adjusted when the power is turned on.

Next, the game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-12. The game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same manner as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration. In addition to these processes, the basic configuration The difference is that the power interruption process in step S19, which was omitted in the above, and the ball ejection state determination process, which is a feature point of the game control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG, are provided.

In the power cut processing in step S19, it is detected whether or not a power cutoff signal is output from the power supply board 17 (whether or not it is turned on). The power supply cutoff signal is a signal output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power supply. When it is detected that a power cutoff signal has been output, as described above, the above-mentioned ball ejection state flag and the like required for restoring the state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 to the state at the time of power failure are included. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. If it is not detected that the power cutoff signal has been output, the power cutoff process is terminated. Then, after executing the ball ejection state determination process in step S20, each process in steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball ejection state determination process in step S20 of the feature unit 162SG will be described with reference to FIG. 11-13 (a). FIG. 11-13 (a) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing content of the ball ejection state determination process in step S20.

In the ball ejection state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether or not the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state or the first high ball ejection state. It is determined whether it is in the state or the second high ball output state (step 162 SGS01).

When the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive villas stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is "5" or more, which is the first determination number. It is determined whether or not there is (step 162 SGS02). If it is not more than the first determination number of "5", that is, if it is not in the consecutive villa state, or if the number of consecutive villas is less than 5 even in the consecutive villa state (step 162SGS02; N), Ends the ball ejection status determination process. On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the number of first determinations (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether or not the number of consecutive villas is "10" or more, which is the number of second determinations. Determine (step 162 SGS03).

When the number of consecutive villas is not more than "10" which is the second determination number (step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive villas reaches "5" which is the first determination number, the first ball is ejected. It is determined that the flag has been ejected, "1" corresponding to the first ejected state is set (step 162SGS06), and the first stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b) (step 162SGS07). ). Since the update of the number of consecutive villas is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive villas is a jackpot in which the jackpot period extension adjustment of the first stage is not executed, and the first stage The jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the 6th to 10th jackpots of consecutive villas.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is the fanfare production period at the start of the jackpot state, which is the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 constituting the jackpot is not open, and the round game end. The interval period from the start of the next round game to the start of the next round game, and the ending effect period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0", so that the same number of game balls By extending the period of the jackpot game that is paid out, the number of game balls that are paid out in a unit time will be reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-21, the extension lengths of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are higher than those in the first high ball ejection state in which the ball ejection state flag is set to "1". The second high ball output state in which "2" is set in the ball state flag is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball output state in which "1" is set in the ball output state flag is set. , The extension length is relatively short in the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, and the second high ball ejection state jackpot period extension adjustment in which "2" is set in the ball ejection status flag has a relatively long extension length. It is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is started to light up, the notification that the high ball ejection state has been reached is started (step 162SGS08), and the variable display number of times after the determination of the high ball ejection state is a predetermined number of times. The variable display remaining number (100) is set after the judgment to specify the remaining number of times until it reaches 100 times, and the number of consecutive villa jackpots that have occurred since it was judged to be in a high ball output state. After setting the initial value "0" for the number of villas (step 162SGS09), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. Although the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a form in which a predetermined number of times is 100 times, the present invention is not limited to this, and these times depend on specifications such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot continuation rate. May be changed as appropriate.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas is "10" or more, which is the number of second determinations (step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive villas reaches "10", which is the number of second determinations, the second ball is ejected. It was determined that the state was reached, "2" corresponding to the second ball ejection state was set in the ball ejection status flag (step 162SGS04), and the adjustment of the second stage was started as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b). After that (step 162SGS05), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. Since the update of the number of consecutive villas is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment is executed for the jackpot after the 11th consecutive villa count.

Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive villas after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of end determinations for ending the adjustment. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive villas has reached the end determination number of 10 times after the determination (step 162SGS10). The feature unit 162SG exemplifies a form in which the number of end determinations is 10 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these times are specified in specifications such as a jackpot probability and a jackpot continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

When the number of consecutive villas after the judgment is 10 times or more, which is the number of times of the end judgment (step 162SGS10; N), that is, after the number of consecutive villas is 5 times or more and it is determined that the ball is in a high ball output state, the consecutive villa state is changed. When the number of consecutive villa jackpots that occur without ending reaches 10 times, it is determined whether or not the game state is in the low base state, that is, whether or not the consecutive villa state has ended. (Step 162SGS11), if the gaming state is in the low base state (step 162SGS11; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS13. The number of consecutive villas is reset when the consecutive villa state ends and the base state becomes low.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive villas after judgment is not 10 times or more which is the number of end judgments (step 162SGS10; N), or when the number of consecutive villas after judgment is 10 times or more which is the number of end judgments (step 162SGS10; Y). When the gaming state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether or not the number of remaining variable display after determination set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

When the remaining number of variable display after determination is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, after the number of consecutive villas is 5 or more and it is determined that the ball is in a high ball output state, the variable display is 100 times, which is a predetermined number. If is not executed, the ball ejection state determination process is terminated.

When the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is "0" (step 162 SGS12; Y), that is, when the predetermined number of variable displays of 100 times has been executed since the determination of the high ball output state has been executed. Step 162 Proceed to SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball ejection status flag to "0", after the adjustment of the first stage or the second step described above is completed (step 162SGS14), the lighting of the high ball ejection status notification LED 162SG071 is terminated. After finishing the notification that the adjustment is being performed in the high ball output state (step 162SGS15), the variable display remaining number after the judgment and the number of consecutive villas after the judgment are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. ..

In step 162SGS17, after executing the transmission setting of the ball ejection state specification command corresponding to the value of the ball ejection status flag set in any of the steps of step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06, and step 162SGS13, the ball ejection state determination is performed. End the process. The ball ejection state designation command set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG.

As described above, when the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 (a) is executed, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to the time when the power supply is started, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (b). Similarly, when it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment for extending the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment for extending the jackpot game period is executed, but the first ball ejection state determination process is performed. When the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated to "1" by determining the ball ejection state, the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage. The variable display time extension of the first stage is extended. Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment, in which the duration of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage, are performed. Further, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated to "2" by determining the second high ball ejection state in the ball ejection state determination process, the variable display time is longer than that of the first stage. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment that is extended to the stage length and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment that the jackpot game period is extended to the second stage length longer than the first stage It is executed, and it is notified by lighting of the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 that these adjustments are being executed.

Further, when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "1" or "2", the number of consecutive villas after the judgment reaches the end judgment count, or the variable display remaining number after the determination becomes 0 (ball ejection status flag). (When the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of is set to "1" or "2"), the value of the ball ejection status flag is updated to "0", and the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period The extension adjustment is completed.

Further, the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from "0" to "1". The high ball ejection status notification LED 162SG071 is not limited, and is not turned on from the timing when the value of the ball ejection status flag is updated from "0" to "1" during a normal game, and the ball ejection status flag is set. When a power failure occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", the light may be turned on only for a certain period from the time of recovery from the power failure.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the ball ejection status flag value is "2". In that case, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball ejection state designation command to the effect control board 12 only when the value of the ball ejection state flag changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 always issues a ball ejection state specification command every time the ball ejection state determination process is executed or every time the variable display is executed. It may be sent to. Further, in the feature unit 162SG, a mode in which a ball ejection state designation command is provided as a part of the effect control command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball ejection state designation command is replaced with the ball ejection state designation command. , A game state designation command corresponding to each ball ejection state (low ball ejection state, first high ball ejection state, second high ball ejection state) may be provided.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 162 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" (step 162SGS102; N). Step 162 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 162 SGS 101 (step 162 SGS 101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 162 SGS 102 (step 162 SGS 102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 162 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 162SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 162 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS105 (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" (step 162SGS105; N). Step 162 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the starting port buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 162SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 162 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 162SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 162 SGS 110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 162 SGS 111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 162SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 162SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 162 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162 SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162 SGS 115), and then the process of step 162 SGS 104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 162 SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162 SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 11-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 162 SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 162SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-16) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIG. 11-17), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 162SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103) first determines the state of the time saving flag and the probability change flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152. By confirming or the like, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is specified (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 162SGS121, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 162SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the above one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 is displayed. Select and set (step 162 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 162SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 162SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 162SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 162SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 162SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 162 SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 162SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 11-7, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to A is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 small determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 162 SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 162SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 162 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and the step Proceed to 162SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 162SGS136), the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 162SGS137), the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162 SGS 127, step 162 SGS 130, step 162 SGS 131, step 162 SGS 135, step 162 SGS 136, and step 162 SGS 137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are executed. (Step 162 SGS138), the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above. In this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach). It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 162 SGS 138 to the effect control board 12 (step 162 SGS 132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of second special symbol hold storage is "0" (step 162SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 162SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the hold stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 162 SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data of the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit 162SG151B are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162 SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designated buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer, to "2" (step 162SGS144), the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 162SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 162SGS141 that the number of stored second special figures is "0", and the number of stored first special figures is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the hold stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A corresponding to the hold number "1". As the data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 162 SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. At the same time, the data of the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure hold storage unit 162SG151A are stored. The indicated pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 162SGS148), the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

In step 162 SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 11-4 is used as a table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 162SGS150a). In this step 162SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time, and thus the step. In the processing of 162SGS150a, the special figure display result is set to "" By determining whether or not to make a "big hit", when the game state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) as "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 162SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be selected according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 162SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 162SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability variation C" corresponding to probability variation jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 11-4 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 162 SGS150c). In step 162SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162 SGS156, as a result of pre-determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state (whether or not the big hit flag is turned on), whether or not to control the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done), and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 162SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 162SGS154 is "probability variation big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the finalized special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the finalized special symbol is set in step 162SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 162SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 162SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot B". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 162SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the variable pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the determination in step 162SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), the game state is changed to the probability change state or the time reduction by determining whether or not the time reduction flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in the state (step 162SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 162SGS168; Y). Step 162 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example, the storage of the reserved storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. By reading the value or the like, the reserved storage number of the variable special figure is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved stored number of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A for deviation is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 162 SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 162 SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 162SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 162SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 162 SGS 164, step 162 SGS 165, step 162 SGS 167, step 162 SGS 169, step 162 SGS 1711, step 162 SGS 173, and step 162 SGS 174, for example, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation. By referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table A to D based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162 SGS175). Even if the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the same fluctuation pattern, if the value of the ball ejection state flag at that time is "1", the first high ball ejection state corresponds to the first high ball ejection state. The fluctuation pattern of the variable display time that has been extended and adjusted by one step will be determined, and if the value of the ball ejection state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball ejection state. The variation pattern of the variable display time for which the extension adjustment of the second stage is performed is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, the fluctuation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball ejection state flag.

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined in the process of step 162SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step 162 SGS 170 includes a process of determining whether or not to set the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “off”.

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 162SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special diagram games using the second special symbol (step 162 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the process of step 162SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 162SGS177). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with the setting data indicating the stored address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 162SGS177, the special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the value of the ball ejection state flag, is set for the fluctuation pattern determined in step 162SGS175 (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result (special symbol display result). The time required. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 162SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162 SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 The designated command, the first variable start command or the second variable start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command will be transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted. , The game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, and the like may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S113 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 162 SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 162 SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and when the jackpot flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the jackpot flag is further turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 162 SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 162SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 162SGS190b). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 162SGS184), hit start 1 designated command (probability variation jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variation jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variation jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 162 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 162 SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare effect for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot in the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS187). At this time, as the jackpot display time set in the jackpot display time timer, the jackpot display time corresponding to the ball ejection status flag is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", 30,000 corresponding to the non-extended fanfare production period corresponding to the low ball ejection state of 30,000 milliseconds. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", 40,000 milliseconds corresponding to the fanfare production period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state is set as the jackpot display time. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2", the jackpot display time is set to 60,000 milliseconds corresponding to the fanfare production period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball ejection state. ..

Then, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probability change big hit A, 5 times in the case of probability change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probability change big hit C) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), in step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". Although not particularly shown in this feature unit 162SG, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the game state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state), "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter, and the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is the probability variation jackpot C. If there is, the probability change flag is turned on (the game state is controlled to the high probability and low base state), and "0" is set as the value of the time reduction counter. Then, when the jackpot type of the jackpot game completed in the jackpot game end process is a non-probability variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time reduction flag and sets "100" as the value of the time reduction counter. ing. Occasionally, the process proceeds to step 162 SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 162SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 162SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time reduction counter is increased. When is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 162SGS194), it corresponds to the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 162SGS195), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. In addition, with the execution of step 162 SGS195, the number of consecutive villas is also reset.

Then, after the determination, the variable display remaining number update process is executed (step 162 SGS196). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number update process, it is determined whether or not the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0", and if it is not "0" (when the remaining number exists), the remaining number is set to 1. Subtraction update is performed, and if it is "0", the variable display remaining number update process is terminated after the determination.

Next, in step 162SGS197, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 162SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 162SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set with a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending effect for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 as the jackpot end display time. (Step 162 SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, the jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball ejection status flag is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", the timer corresponding to the non-extended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball ejection state of 60,000 milliseconds. The value is set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70,000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state, is set, and the ball ejection state is set. If the value of the flag is "2", the timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 162SGS210), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 162SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 162SGS209), the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter by executing step 162SGS211 and step 162SGS212. After that, the process proceeds to step 162 SGS 213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 162SGS214). Then, the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag turned on is set (step 162SGS215).

Then, the update process of the number of consecutive villas and the number of consecutive villas after the determination is executed (step 162 SGS216). In this update process, specifically, whether the finished jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in the low base state or the consecutive villa jackpot that occurred in the high base state, for example, the finished jackpot. It is specified from the value of the state flag before the start of the big hit (“0” for the low base, “1” for the high base) corresponding to the state before the occurrence of Set "1". On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive villa jackpot, since the number of consecutive villas is already a value other than "0", 1 is added and updated to the number of consecutive villas. Further, in the case of a consecutive villa jackpot, if the initial value is set in the number of consecutive villas after the determination, 1 is added and updated to the number of consecutive villas after the determination.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 162 SGS217).

Although not particularly shown in this feature unit 162SG, when the number of round executions has not reached the set upper limit number of times in the jackpot release post-processing (step S116), the CPU 103 responds to the value of the ball ejection state flag. Set the interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-21, if the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to 5000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended interval period corresponding to the low ball ejection state. To set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1", the timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball ejection state, is set. If the value of the ball ejection state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7,000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball ejection state, is set.

After setting these timer values in the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the jackpot opening post-processing is executed, and the CPU 103 is large based on the timer out of the interval period timer. While controlling the opening of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the opening of the jackpot, that is, a new round game is started.

As described above, in the present feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in the period from the derivation display of the jackpot symbol to the end of the jackpot game based on the derivation display of the jackpot symbol, the ball ejection state flag is set. Regardless of the value, the round game continues until a certain opening period (for example, 29 seconds) elapses or a certain number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls win the big prize opening. The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 and 11-21, the game ball cannot win the big prize opening due to the closure of the big winning opening, that is, the fanfare effect that the prize ball cannot be won. The period, interval period, and ending effect period are lengthened as the value of the ball ejection status flag changes from 0 to 1 to 2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the payout status flag, so that the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player is prevented from decreasing, and the number of prize balls that can be paid out is large. By changing (prolonging) the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period, which are the periods during which prizes cannot be won in the winning opening, according to the value of the payout status flag, the number of prize balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, the processing that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 11-22, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (step 162 SGS221).

If there is a receive command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 162 SGS 222). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 162SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 162 SGS 222 (step 162 SGS 222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 162 SGS 224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 162SGS224 (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 162 SGS 226 (step 162 SGS 226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 162 SGS 227). If the receive command is not a variable category command in step 162 SGS 227 (step 162 SGS 227; N), it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 162 SGS 228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). Then, when it is the second hold storage number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 162SGS229 and step 162SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the hold display mode is undecided (display undecided flag). If there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is set to "1" (the display restriction flag is turned on) (step 162 SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol designation command in step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; Y), or in step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processes of (step 162SGS233), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (not shown), and the process returns to the process of step 162SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 162SGS230 (step 162SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 162SGS234), and then the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, when the reception command is a ball ejection state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state from the ball ejection state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, and responds to the specified ball ejection state. Processing such as turning the flag on may be executed. By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the ball ejection state by referring to the flag.

If there is no receive command in the command reception buffer in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS221; N). 162SGS237). If the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 162SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage is completed. When the number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162 SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry is set to "1" in the effect restriction flag (the display undecided flag is turned on). End the command analysis process.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS241), and whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning. Is determined by whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination is made. It is determined whether or not the remaining number of times of the rear variable display is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number (step 162SGS242b). When the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number (step 162SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the hold display flag. It is set.

If the remaining variable display number after determination is larger than the look-ahead limit number (step 162SGS242b; N), whether or not the effect restriction flag of the entry is in the ON state (whether or not "1" is set). Is determined (step 162SGS242c). When the effect restriction flag is on (step 162SGS242c; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, “0” corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the effect restriction flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a probabilistic jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is a symbol designation command indicating C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is displayed. , Set to hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed for the hold memory that becomes the probability variation big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not the symbol designation command indicating the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 162 SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or non-probabilistic jackpot) (step 162SGS243b; N), the entry is concerned. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of (step 162SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 162 SGS245).

In step 162 SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162SGS244. ..

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display is displayed. It is displayed in area 5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect may not be decided to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A is increased, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In this feature unit 162SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 162SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 162SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 162SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a "non-reach" variation pattern category, and if it is C601H, it is a "super reach" variation pattern category. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 162SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 162 SGS248).

In step 162 SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-24 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 162SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold is displayed in a white star shape (☆) in which the hold memory display is a specific mode. It is displayed in the storage display area 5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Further, when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 162SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 162SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 162 SGS249).

After the execution of step 162SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 162SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 162SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 162SGS249 (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step). 162SGS250), the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A after the shift are determined according to the stored contents of FIG. As shown in A), the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", the display mode is "○" as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B). When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the display mode of. If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of the second special figure reserved storage is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to the reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag of, for example, the second hold storage display is in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆". It is displayed in area 5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 5U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (B), the hold storage display also has a predetermined shift direction (this feature unit) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory each time the variable display is executed. In 162SG, it shifts toward the center of the screen).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 162SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 5U.

Although the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 162SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 5D is used. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of the start winning in step 162SGS242, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning is determined. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 162 SGS242 If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

11-26 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162 SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variation start command reception flag is off in step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 162SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the top (step 162 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from among. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. If it is a symbol and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes (missing symbol) is determined and the fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a combination of reach-off decorative symbols such as "121" and "464" (missing symbol) is determined. ) Is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-27 to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect in the variable display (step 162SGS277). It should be noted that the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of any of the four advance notice effects A to the advance notice effect D can be determined in the advance notice effect determination process, as will be described later. Is not limited to this, and the number of possible advance notice effects may be 3 or less or 5 or more.

In the advance notice effect determination process of the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the ball ejection state and sets the advance notice effect type determination table corresponding to the specified ball ejection state (step 162SGS290). The ball ejection state may be specified, for example, from the value of the flag that is turned on when the ball ejection state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state as the low ball ejection state, it selects the advance notice effect type determination table A and sets the ball ejection state to the first high. When the ball ejection state is specified, the advance notice effect type determination table B may be selected, and when the ball ejection state is specified as the second high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table C may be selected.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the variable pattern (step 162 SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for designating the variable display result (off, probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, probabilistic jackpot C, non-probability jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the result specification command This can be specified by the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining the advance notice effect is extracted, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the type of advance notice effect to be executed are determined using the advance notice effect type determination table set in step 162SG290 (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table A is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, 85. The non-execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 5%, and the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution is decided, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 50% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 30% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 25%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 65%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table B is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 5%, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%, and the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution of the notice effect D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 50% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 25% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 25%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 50%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 15%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball ejection state is the second high ball ejection state, the advance notice effect type determination table C is used, and if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at the rate of 8%, the execution of the notice effect B is decided at the rate of 4%, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 3%, and the execution of the notice effect C is decided at the rate of 0%. The execution of the notice effect D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% decides not to execute the advance notice effect, 45% decides to execute the advance notice effect A, and 20% decides to execute the advance notice effect B. It is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is a big hit excluding the big hit C, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 10%, the execution of the notice effect A is decided at a rate of 15%, and the notice effect is decided at a rate of 45%. The execution of B is decided, the execution of the notice effect C is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the notice effect D is decided at a rate of 10%.

That is, as the notice effect in the feature unit 162SG, the notice effect D has the highest jackpot expectation (the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot), and the notice effect C has a larger hit expectation than the notice D. It is set low, the notice effect B is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the notice effect C, and the notice effect A is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than the notice effect B. When the notice effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set lower than when any notice effect is executed (big hit expectation: notice effect D> notice effect C> notice effect B> notice effect). A> Notice production not executed).

In addition, paying attention to the number of advance notice effects that can be executed in each payout state, there are two advance notice effects that can be executed in the low payout state, the notice effect A and the notice effect B, and can be executed in the first high payout state. There are three notice effects: notice effect A, notice effect B, and notice effect C. There are four. That is, in this feature unit 162SG, the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the consecutive villa state after the first hit occurs, so that the game is delayed during the consecutive villa. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment due to the storage.

In particular, in the second high ball output state, the advance notice effect D for determining that the variable display result will be a big hit can be executed. Therefore, the advance notice effect D is executed during the variable display in the second high ball output state. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined after the execution of step 162SGS292 (step 162SGS293). If the execution of the advance notice effect has not been decided (step 162 SGS293; N), the advance notice effect determination process ends. When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (step 162SGS293; Y), the advance notice effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the advance notice effect execution decision flag is turned on (step 162SGS295), and the advance notice is given. The production determination process ends.

After executing the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 11-26, and in step 162 SGS278, whether the effect control CPU 120 has the advance notice effect execution decision flag turned on. That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect of either "notice effect A" or "notice effect B" is determined in the advance notice effect determination process of step 162SGS277.

If the advance notice effect execution decision flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step 162 SGS279, the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set with a value according to the period until the start of the advance notice effect (step 162SGS279), and the advance notice effect is executed. The determination flag is turned off (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, when the advance notice effect execution decision flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through step 162SGS279 and step 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the advance notice effect, the feature unit 162SG performs an effect (not shown) indicating a precursor of the execution of the advance notice effect before the timing when the advance notice effect is started, and starts the advance notice effect. Since the timing is set as the start timing of the advance notice effect, a period shorter than the period until the advance notice effect is started is set, and the start timing of these advance notice effects is the process table of the advance notice effect executed from the start of the advance notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when these precursory effects are not performed in the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect is provided. Since the start timing is the start timing of the advance notice effect, the period until the start timing of the advance notice effect may be set in the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect.

In step 162 SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the ball ejection state and selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the specified ball ejection state and the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162 SGS282).

In addition, in step 162SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 may specify the ball ejection state by referring to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 162SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern specification command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball ejection state and the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 162 SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162 SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 162 SGS286).

By executing the variable display start setting process by the effect control CPU 120 as described above, in the feature unit 162SG, the ball ejection state is any of the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second high ball ejection state. Even so, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative symbol in conjunction with the variable display time of the special figure. In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the ball ejection state can be executed by the value of the effect ball ejection state flag and the variation pattern specification command. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the CPU 103 specifies a variation pattern determination state that specifies in which ball ejection state the variation pattern specification command is determined together with the variation pattern specification command. A command can be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), and each time the effect control CPU 120 receives these fluctuation pattern designation commands and fluctuation pattern determination state designation commands, a decorative symbol corresponding to the ball ejection state is provided. The variable display of may be executed.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is set (it is determined to perform the advance notice effect), or the flag for executing the advance notice effect is on (during the execution of the advance notice effect). In that case (step 162SGS304; Y), the advance notice effect processing is executed (step 162SGS305). If neither the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect nor the flag for executing the advance notice effect is off, the process proceeds to step 162 SGS306 without executing the advance notice effect process in step 162 SGS305.

In step 162 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 162SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 162 SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 162SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols (displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative symbols). Image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 162 SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern. The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

If the variable display control timer is not timered out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timered out (step 162SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 162SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 162 SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards or the like. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 162 SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

When the advance notice effect is executed while the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer in the advance notice effect process, and starts the advance notice effect. Determines whether the wait timer has timed out. When the timer for waiting for the start of the advance notice effect is timered out, that is, when the start timing of the advance notice effect is reached, the process table for the advance notice effect according to the type of the advance notice effect decided to be executed is selected, and the process for the advance notice effect is selected. Start the timer. That is, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the first process data in the advance notice effect process table. In addition, the advance notice effect processing is terminated with the advance notice effect execution flag turned on.

Then, when the advance notice effect is executed when the advance notice effect execution flag is on, the effect control CPU 120 performs subtraction update of the process timer for the advance notice effect, and the process timer for the advance notice effect is timered out. Judge whether or not. If the process timer for the advance notice effect is not timered out, the control of the effect device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for the advance notice effect is out of the timer. , Switch process data. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next advance notice effect again, and control the effect device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the advance notice effect processing as described above, the advance notice effect can be executed during the variable display.

In the feature unit 162SG described above, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 exemplifies a mode in which only lighting / extinguishing is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a high ball ejection state. In, the variable display time extension adjustment is executed because the variable display is executed, but when the jackpot period extension adjustment is not executed because it is not in the jackpot state, it lights up in green (first mode) and is high output. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed due to the variable display not being executed, the light is turned on in red (second mode). Then, it may be possible to confirm (understand) which adjustment is being executed.

Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, the value of the ball ejection state flag is continuously updated from 0 → 1 → 2 in the consecutive villa state (the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state from the low ball ejection state). Depending on the state and changing to the second high ball output), the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period of the jackpot game in the consecutive villa state are extended to extend the ball output per unit time. Although the embodiment in which the number is suppressed, that is, the speed at which the prize balls are given is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state, the low output Special figure such as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach than the ball state The fluctuation time is long. The fluctuation pattern is determined at a high rate. It is also possible to extend the period until the game is completed and reduce the number of balls to be played per unit time.

Further, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed for a form in which the fluctuation pattern can be determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table for the high ball output state in the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. When the remaining variable display count is still set to a value of 1 or more and the hold storage of the variable display executed after the remaining variable display count after judgment becomes 0 occurs, the effect pattern of the pre-reading notice effect There is a large difference between the fluctuation pattern suggested by (Variable display is executed according to the variation pattern of reach, etc.) may occur, and the pre-reading notice effect may become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading notice setting process (see FIG. 11-23) of the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, when the remaining variable display number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the pre-reading notice effect is executed. By limiting, the look-ahead notice effect is inappropriate by preventing a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the effect pattern of the look-ahead advance notice effect and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display. Can be prevented from becoming.

Further, although not particularly shown in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag in the jackpot middle effect process shown in FIG. 9, and the value of the effect ball ejection state flag. By selecting the process table for the fanfare effect according to the above and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare effect according to the ball ejection state may be executed.

Further, although not particularly shown in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the value of the effect ball ejection state flag in the ending effect process shown in FIG. 9, and sets the value of the effect ball ejection state flag. The ending effect according to the ball ejection state may be executed by selecting the process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13 to determine whether the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state or a high ball ejection state. If it is determined that the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the value of the ball ejection state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to the low ball ejection state to the high ball ejection state. By setting the value according to "1", the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the jackpot game are lengthened (adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is started. ) Is possible. In addition, after the ball ejection status flag is set to "1", the value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the ball ejection status is set to high. By updating from the payout state to the low payout state, the fanfare production period, interval period, and ending production period during the big hit game are returned to the original period (the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time is completed). ). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out per unit time during the period of consecutive villas, and it is possible to prevent excessive increase in gambling due to excessive prize balls being paid out in a short period of time. ..

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 11-8, only the special figure variable display time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern is set. By prolonging the period and not prolonging the special figure variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach and super reach, the increase in the amount of data related to variable display is suppressed, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is lengthened. This prevents the decline in interest.

In this feature unit 162SG, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball per unit time is started by setting the value of the payout state flag from "0" to "1", and the variable display of 100 times is displayed. An example is illustrated in which the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball is terminated by setting the value of the payout state flag to "0" again based on the execution, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, it is based on the fact that a time measuring means (for example, a real-time clock or a timer) capable of measuring time is provided, and the time measuring means measures a certain time (for example, 15 minutes or 30 minutes) from the start of the adjustment. The adjustment may be completed. That is, as the termination condition in the present invention, "a certain time has elapsed during the period of the consecutive villa state after the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to" 1 "" may be used.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, as an end condition for ending the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time, a mode in which only one variable display is executed 100 times is provided has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions for ending the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time may be provided. When a plurality of end conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the end conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when the plurality of end conditions are satisfied. The adjustment may be completed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state. In the state, the special figure variable display time in the fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "0" (when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state). Therefore, by prolonging the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a big hit during the period of the consecutive villa state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls during the period of the consecutive villa state without reducing it.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-20 and 11-21, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag during the big hit game, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set. The fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period in which the game ball cannot win the big prize opening are set longer than when "0" is set. Therefore, the game ball cannot be won in the big winning opening between each round game during the big hit game without reducing the number of game balls that can be won in each round game according to the value of the ball ejection state flag. The period can be extended, and the payout speed of prize balls per unit time during the period of the consecutive villa state can be reduced.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, when "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag, it is a big hit game than when "0" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag. Although a form in which a total of three periods of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period are lengthened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" or "1". When "2" is set, any one of the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the jackpot game is set as compared with the case where "0" is set as the value of the ball ejection status flag. The two periods may be lengthened.

Further, in this feature unit 162SG, the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from 0 to 1 to 2, so that the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the big hit game are gradually lengthened. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare effect period, the interval period, and the ending effect period If any one or two of these periods are extended and the value of the payout status flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining period may be extended.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the recovery condition is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection status flag to a low ball ejection status flag. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent adjustments that reduce the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, when the recovery upper limit is established, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started again due to a power failure, "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag when the power failure occurs. If it is set, the CPU 103 sets "1" or "2" as the value of the ball ejection status flag again, so that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure is adjusted. Can be resumed.

In this feature unit 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power failure, if "1" or "2" is set as the value of the ball ejection state flag when the power failure occurs, the CPU 103 ejects the ball. Although the embodiment in which "1" or "2" is set again as the value of the state flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power failure, the ball is ejected. It is also possible to set "0" as the value of the state flag, that is, not to execute the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize balls that was executed when the power failure occurred. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored as backup data when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-13, when the CPU 103 determines in the ball ejection state determination process that the ball ejection state is in a high ball ejection state, the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is started to be lit by the control of the CPU 103. It is possible to recognize from outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball is being executed by lighting the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071.

Although the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is produced and controlled. The LED may be turned on by the control of the CPU 120. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU103) can transmit control information (effect control command) capable of identifying whether or not the high-granted state is provided to the effect control means (effect control CPU 120). Therefore, the effect control means may be provided with a notification means (high ball output state notification LED 162SG071) capable of notifying that the high grant state is controlled according to the identification of the high grant state from the control information. Just do it.

Further, the feature unit 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball ejection state notification LED 162SG071 is provided as a notification means capable of notifying that the high ball ejection state (high ball ejection state) is determined in the present invention. Is not limited to this, and the notification means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) that notifies that a high ball output state is determined by a specific sound output, and a high ball output state. An image display means (for example, an image display device 5) that notifies that a determination has been made by displaying a specific image, and an information output means that can output information (signal) according to the determination of a high ball output state. And so on.

Further, the control cycle for turning on / off the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 shall be the same as the control cycle for turning on / off the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20. Then, the CPU 103 can execute the notification by the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 by the lighting / extinguishing control common to the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display 20. It has become.

Further, the CPU 103 executes the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the transmission setting of the ball ejection state designation command in the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13, thereby causing the effect control board 12 (effect control). It is possible to send a ball ejection status specification command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and sets the specified ball ejection state to the specified ball ejection state. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the effect type of the advance notice effect to be executed by using the corresponding advance notice effect type determination table. In particular, in this feature unit 162SG, a notice effect (preliminary effect type) that can be executed in each of the low ball output state, the first high ball output state, and the second ball output state. Is different, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the advance notice effect according to these ball ejection states.

In this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-28, the ball ejection state is executed in the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second ball ejection state, respectively. Although the possible notice effect (preliminary effect type) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state and the case where the first high ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state. , In the case of the second payout state, the noticeable effect (notice effect type) that can be executed is the same, but the determination ratio of each notice effect type may be different, and the payout state is low. In any of the cases of the ball state, the first high ball output state, and the second ball output state, the executable advance notice effect (notice effect type) and the determination ratio of each advance notice effect type are the same. There may be.

Further, in the present feature unit 162SG, it is possible to execute a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, and an example is made in which the type of the notice effect that can be executed is different depending on the ball ejection state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a probability change suggestion effect suggesting that the jackpot game is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, or the jackpot game is up to 10 rounds during the jackpot game. It is possible to execute a continuation suggestion effect that suggests continuation in a plurality of effect types, and the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state, the first high ball ejection state, and the second high ball ejection state. In some cases, the determination ratio of the effect type that can be executed as the probabilistic change suggestion effect or the continuous suggestion effect and the effect type that can be executed may be different.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11-23, the effect control CPU 120 can display the hold display of the new hold memory generated by the start winning in a plurality of display patterns by executing the read-ahead notice setting process. The pre-reading notice effect can be executed, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit differs depending on which display pattern the hold display is displayed. Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-reading advance notice effect when the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (hold display is normally white). (Displayed with a blank circle), so if the pre-reading notice effect is executed for the reserved memory generated in the start winning in the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, the pre-reading It is possible to prevent the pre-reading advance notice effect from becoming inappropriate due to the change of the ball output state to the low ball output state before the variable display based on the hold memory, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is started. It has become.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state, if the variable display remaining number after determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the pre-reading notice effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball ejection state is the first high ball ejection state or the second high ball ejection state, the pre-reading notice effect is not uniquely executed. You may do so.

Although the feature portions of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the feature unit 162SG, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the fanfare production period, the interval period, and the ending production period during the big hit game are longer than when the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although adjustments have been made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by prolonging the special figure variable display time of some fluctuation patterns. As a modification 162SG-1, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the determination rate of the probability variation jackpot A is lowered as the jackpot type and the probability variation jackpot B is lower than the case where the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. You may increase the decision rate of. By doing so, when the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state, it becomes easy to determine the probability variation jackpot B in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds as the jackpot type, and the probability variation jackpot A in which the number of lands is 10 rounds. Since it is difficult to determine, the number of prize balls to be paid out in one big hit game can be reduced, and as a result, adjustments can be made to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in a high payout state.

Further, as a modified example 162SG-2, when the ball ejection state is a high ball ejection state, the probability variation jackpot (probability variation hit A, probability variation jackpot B, probability variation) is as a jackpot type than when the ball ejection state is a low ball ejection state. By lowering the determination rate of the jackpot C) and increasing the determination rate of the non-probability variable jackpot, it may be easier to control the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. By doing so, in the time saving state (low accuracy high base state), the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is lower than in the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), and as a result, 100 times in the time saving state. By executing the variable display of, the end of the consecutive villa state can be easily determined and the normal state can be easily controlled. Therefore, the number of consecutive big hit games can be reduced through the high base state. It is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in the ball-out state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" in the present invention is the process of step 162SGS190 to step 162SGS194 in the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 11-18 by the CPU 103 (the process of determining the value of the time reduction counter and the time reduction). The part that executes the process of subtracting the value of the number-of-times counter, the process of determining the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction, and the process of turning off the time-saving flag) corresponds to this.

Further, the CPU 103 of the feature unit 162SG changes the game state from the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low) based on the completion of 100 variable displays after the end of the big hit game of the non-probability change big hit. The mode of controlling to the base state), that is, ending the consecutive villa state has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 has a high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base). In the state), a high-base state fall lottery (end lottery) is executed every time the variable display is started by the special symbol normal processing or every time the variable display is finished by the special symbol stop processing, and the lottery is performed. Based on the winning, the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state) may be controlled to the low accuracy low base state, that is, the consecutive villa state may be terminated. Regarding the case where the fall lottery is executed every time the variable display is started or the variable display is finished, for example, when the ball ejection state is the high ball ejection state, the ball ejection state is the low ball ejection state. It suffices to make it easier to win the fall lottery at a higher rate than in the case. By doing so, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive villa state in the high ball output state and it becomes easier to control the normal state, so that the number of consecutive big hit games generated through the high base state can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in a high payout state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" of the present invention is a process of executing a fall lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when the special symbol stop process is executed. , The process of turning off the probability change flag and the time saving flag when the fall lottery is won is applicable.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "0". The first high ball output state and the second high ball output state are changed to the low ball output state on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1", and then sets the ball output state flag to "1". The value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of the jackpot game a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) during the period, that is, the "end condition" in the present invention is set to the "ball ejection state flag". After setting the value of to "1", a predetermined number of jackpot games have been executed during the period of the consecutive villa state. " By doing so, the CPU 103 has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), which is the number of times of execution of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1". Therefore, the value of the ball ejection status flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "0". The first high ball output state and the second high ball output state are changed to the low ball output state on condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state. Although the mode to be controlled has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1", and then sets the ball output state flag to "1". The value of the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of game balls that have won in each winning opening and the number of game balls that have entered the out opening during the period has reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). That is, the number of game balls used for the game has reached a predetermined number during the period of the consecutive villa state after the "end condition" in the present invention is set to "the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to" 1 ". May be. By doing so, the CPU 103 outputs based on the fact that the number of game balls used for the game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) after setting the value of the ball ejection state flag to "1". The value of the ball state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" (first high ball ejection state) or "2" (second high ball ejection state), the special figure variable display in each fluctuation pattern is displayed. An example is illustrated in which an adjustment is performed to reduce the payout speed of a prize ball in a high payout state by prolonging the time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and depends on the value of the payout state flag. Therefore, adjustments may be made to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in the high payout state by making the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-30 and 11-31 as a modified example 162SG-5, the deviation pattern for when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" (low ball ejection state). Judgment table A, deviation pattern judgment table B for when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "1" (first ball ejection state), the value of the ball ejection status flag is "2" (second ball ejection state) ) Is provided for each of the deviation pattern determination tables C.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A, out of the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 600 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 400 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, and 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C, among the possible ranges 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for the deviation pattern determination, 1 to 200 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. It is assigned to -1, and 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table B are compared, the deviation pattern determination table B has a ratio in which the non-reach variation pattern is determined more than the deviation variation pattern determination table A. Is low, but the rate at which fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are determined is set high. That is, the deviation pattern determination table B is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time than the detachment variation pattern determination table A can be easily determined.

Further, when the deviation pattern determination table B and the deviation variation pattern determination table C are compared, the deviation pattern determination table C has a higher ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern than the deviation variation pattern determination table B. While it is low, the rate at which fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are determined is set high. That is, the deviation pattern determination table C is a variation pattern determination table in which a variation pattern having a longer variable display time than the detachment variation pattern determination table B can be easily determined.

That is, in the deviation pattern determination table A, the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table B, and the deviation fluctuation pattern determination table C, the deviation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and the deviation pattern determination table. A has the shortest average variable display time.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-31, when the value of the ball ejection state flag is "0" and the variable display result is out of order, the out-of-order variation pattern determination table A is selected and the variation pattern is set. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the value of the ball ejection status flag is "1", the variation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected to determine the variation pattern, and the ball ejection status flag is set. If the variable display result is out of alignment when the value is "2", the outlier variation pattern determination table B may be selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the value of the payout state flag, it is possible to execute the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is set to the jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled a specific number of times (five times in the feature unit 162SG) during the period of the consecutive villa state. Although the embodiment in which the value of the payout state flag is set from "0" to "1" has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in the present invention includes a small hit gaming state. But it may be. In particular, a game having the game property that the present invention can be frequently controlled to a small hit game state during a continuous villa state, and a prize ball is paid out by winning a game ball to a large winning opening in these small hit game states. When applied to a machine (so-called small hit rush machine), the total number of times controlled to the big hit game state and the number of times controlled to the small hit game state during the period of the consecutive villa state is a specific number of times (for example, 100). By setting the value of the payout state flag from "0" to "1" based on the fact that the number of times has been reached, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state.

Further, in the feature unit 162SG, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of the non-probability variable jackpot, the time saving control is executed many times by the variable display 100 times after the jackpot game. The non-probability variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of time reduction controls executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 (for example, 50 or 30 times). When a non-probability variable jackpot such as 50 or 30 times of time reduction control is provided in this way, the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball ejection state). After the execution of the non-probability change jackpot game, when the variable display of the time reduction control number according to the non-probability change jackpot is executed, the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of the ball ejection state flag is set to "1". Even if it is not, the value of the ball ejection state flag may be set to "0". In other words, if the non-probability change jackpot is won in the consecutive villa state and the jackpot is not won in the short time state after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probability change jackpot and the normal state is reached, the normal state is reached. Therefore, the adjustment for reducing the payout speed of the prize ball in the high payout state may be completed.

Further, in the present specification, both a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of the feature portion 109SG is applied and a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of the feature portion 162SG is applied are disclosed, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Both the invention of the feature portion 109 and the invention of the feature portion 162SG may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of 1.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the description below but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

Other gaming machines of the present invention include
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a normal state and a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state. And
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, adjustment means (for example, FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-21) for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
With
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 The part where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball ejection state specification command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
When the end condition is satisfied, the updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
Moreover,
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. (The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed) Game machines can be mentioned.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

In addition, as the gaming machine of the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into a normal state and a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state. And
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and
An effect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling an effect based on control information (for example, an effect control command shown in FIG. 11-2) transmitted from the game control means.
The number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period (for example, the period of the consecutive villa state) that has never been controlled to the normal state from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state is When the specified number of times has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive villas is "5" or more, which is the first determination number of times), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value (for example). For example, an update means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the ball ejection state determination process shown in FIG. 11-13) and
As shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-21, adjustment means (for example, FIG. 11-13 and FIG. 11-21) for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is reduced when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the ball ejection state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball ejection state determination process to prolong the fanfare effect period, interval period, and ending effect period during the big hit game).
With
The game control means can transmit control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-13, the CPU 103 can transmit the control information. Step 162 The part where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball ejection state specification command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-27 and 11-28). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the ball ejection state from the received ball ejection state designation command in the advance notice effect determination process, and is variably displaying using the advance notice effect type determination table according to the specified ball ejection state. The part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the type of effect of the advance notice effect to be executed),
When the end condition is satisfied, the updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13, the CPU 103 sets a ball ejection state flag. When the ball is set to "1", the ball ejection status flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment is set to 0),
Moreover,
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed) The gaming machine can be mentioned.
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment for lowering the game value imparting speed is executed, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is excessive in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the game value from being given and the gambling to be excessively increased, and it is possible to execute the effect control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so that the game interest can be improved. .. Further, the suggestion effect can increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop, and the notification effect can be executed to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop. Since the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player's disappointment for not having the temporary stop can be alleviated. Because you will be able to play, you can improve the game fun.

That is, when an adjustment for lowering the game value granting speed (for example, an adjustment for making the variable display time longer than when the game value granting speed is not lowered in the variable pattern selection) is executed, the adjustment is made. Since the effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the game from being given an excessive value in a short period of time and to prevent the game from being deteriorated, and even if the specific effect identification information or the special identification information is not temporarily stopped. Since the effect display is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed, the suggestive effect can be strongly impressed on the player by the afterglow of the effect display, and the effect display is terminated immediately after the predetermined timing has passed. It can alleviate the player's disappointment. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is moderately gambling, easily attracts the interest of the player, and easily improves the interest of the production.

Further, the execution ratio of the suggestion effect may be different depending on the value of the numerical data. Doing so will improve your interest.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed and displayed. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can derive and display the result and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed), the game machine can be mentioned.

Further, a gaming machine (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Pachinko game machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed), the gaming machine can be mentioned. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

FIG. 12 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 12B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 12 (A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the first special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 12 (A).

As shown in FIG. 12B, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the set value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range is in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken and compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time reduction". It is assigned to "out of place", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place". When the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, out of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and the other numerical ranges are set to "missing". Assigned. The case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state is as shown in FIG. 12 (B).

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "big hit" and "out of time saving" in each display result judgment table, as shown in FIG. 13, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the display result determination table for the first special figure in the above, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are common. When only the numerical values in the numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values. The numbers in the range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit judgment values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) set in the previous term. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

Further, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range of the hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the common numerical range (of the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1) When only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value is within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range. The numbers are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

Further, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time reduction state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time reduction loss regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the loss judgment value with time reduction. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the time is shortened. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for the loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the set value 6. Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value overlaps with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical value of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the range. The features of the other display result determination table for the second special figure are the same as those of the display result determination table for the first special figure.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, 65317 to 65317 to the case where the gaming state is the normal state and the time saving state, regardless of the set value. When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range of the time saving and the time saving is out, and the variable special figure is the second special symbol, the set value is set depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set to the common numerical range that is out of time. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the ratio at which the variable display result is out of time reduction is the same ratio for all the set values, so that the gambling property depends on the set value. Can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, with regard to the time-saving loss, which is assigned a common number of judgment values for each setting value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from the time-saving loss reference value of 65317 in any setting value, it can be displayed in a variable manner. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination that the result is out of time reduction.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the set values that can be set are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. .. Further, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 14, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command that specifies to start the jackpot game state is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing", and the effect process flag. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The jackpot effect process in step S17490 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S17590 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature Unit 193SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature unit 193SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, decorative symbols) including specific effect identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous symbols) are variably displayed to derive and display the display result, which is an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game). A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state) (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
As the variable display, the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, and then the variable display is restarted (for example, a pseudo-ream). A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) that can execute the effect).
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. The part to do) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to execute an effect of lowering the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration line is set to the density D1. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols by displaying them, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2),
As the notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35). , The part that makes the left and right decorative symbols invisible by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped by executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player by variably displaying a plurality of types of effect identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) to derive and display the display result. Machine 1)
As a variable display, special identification information (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. A specific effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo continuous effect) that resumes the variable display later.
The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the suggestion effect (for example, the temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
The notification effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the notification effect (for example, the temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect executing means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform an effect of lowering the second low visibility state to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D1 in the image display device 5, the left and right are displayed. A part that further reduces the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2 after reducing the visibility of the decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification. Is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestion effect executing means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and it is possible to increase the uplifting feeling for the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and also to temporarily stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, so that the player can easily recognize that the temporary stop has not been performed, and the player is disappointed that the temporary stop has not been performed. Since the feeling can be softened, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is not temporarily stopped, the suggestion effect execution means is determined to temporarily stop the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in the case of the temporary stop. The effect display is moved toward the position (for example, a portion where the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 15-48 as a modification 193SG-1).
The gaming machine according to the first or second embodiment.
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) has not been temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
The effect display is more transparent after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the display image data is displayed. Since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing and the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 after the switching timing of the display image data, it is displayed more than before the switching timing of the display image data. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the image data switching timing),
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by increasing the transparency of the effect display after a predetermined timing at which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped. A game in which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by making the player recognize that and raising the attention to the background image which is easy to see through the effect display. It can relieve a person's disappointment.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
The suggestion effect executing means puts the effect display at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops. When any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is erased before the stop display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). In the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C, the concentrated line is hidden before the decorative symbols of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of outliers, stop. Part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 4, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for a temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (G) to 15-35 (H)). In addition, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern has a crack and explodes),
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the effect position (for example, the first effect position) overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information). A movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 5, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress the player that the temporary stop is caused by the movement of the movable body and the deformation of the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
The movable body is
The area that overlaps the first operation (for example, the movement from the retracted position shown in FIG. 15-2 to the first effect position) and the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is smaller than that of the first operation. It is possible to perform the second operation (for example, the movement from the retracted position shown in FIG. 15-2 to the second effect position).
In the notification effect, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 15-35 (F), the portion where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect. ),
The gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
According to this feature, it is possible to impress the player that the temporary stop has been made while preventing the movable body from making it difficult to visually recognize the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of Form 8 is
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034).
In the first operation, the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-2, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped during the temporary stop notification effect. The part that emits light with the color of the concentrated line displayed in the suggestion effect),
The gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.
According to this feature, since the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display, the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, FIGS. 15-35 (F) and 15-35 (G)). As shown in the above, a portion for moving the second movable body 193SG033 from the first effect position to the retracted position before the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth embodiment.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is deleted.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (G) to 15-35 (H)). In addition, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern has a crack and explodes),
After the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, a specific effect corresponding display (for example, display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc.) suggesting that the N + 1th variable display is executed is displayed. Displayable specific effect-compatible display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) and
A movable body (for example, the second movable body 193SG033) that can operate at an effect position (for example, the first effect position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific effect corresponding display displayed by the specific effect corresponding display means.
To prepare
The gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase the attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, a second movable body LED193SG034).
The light emitting unit emits light in an manner corresponding to the specific effect corresponding display (for example, when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start number notification effect, it is blue, and when displaying "x3". Is green, and when "x4" is displayed, it is red (the part that emits the second movable LED 193SG034), respectively.
The gaming machine according to the form 10, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, since the light emitting unit emits light in a mode corresponding to the display corresponding to another variable display, it is possible to attract attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestion effect is executed, the special effect (for example, a portion displaying the temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5). (For example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) and
With
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestion effect is displayed in preference to the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestion effect (for example, instead of the normal decorative symbol, a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed. A portion of the image display device 5 that is moved and displayed from above to below),
As the special effect, the special effect executing means has a first effect period (for example, FIG. 15-) until the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves to a predetermined position and temporarily stops. As shown in 33, the predetermined position because the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) did not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing (the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect). It is possible to execute an effect related to the transition between the second effect period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect) and the second effect period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33). As shown in FIGS. 15-33, 15-35, and 15-44, a portion displaying a concentrated line while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh forms.
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestion effect becomes easy, and the transition to the second effect period becomes unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by the special effect. It can be prevented from being lost.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
As the special effect, the special effect executing means receives the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position at a position different from the predetermined position and the second effect. It is possible to execute an effect of overlapping and displaying the semi-transparent specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) at a position corresponding to the period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image in the central portion of the image display device 5). The part that displays),
The gaming machine according to Form 12, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the transition to the second production period can be made more natural.

The gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means can combine and display displays drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-3 and 15-4, image data 1, image data 2, and an image. Data 3 and data drawn as image data 4 can be combined and displayed on the image display device 5).
The drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestion effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 15-3). As shown in the above, a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as the image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn as the image data 2, and a concentrated line is drawn as the image data 4).
The gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13, characterized in that.
According to this feature, since the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect can be drawn separately from the effect display of the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect and the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) can be drawn. ) And the degree of freedom of special production can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect of transforming the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and then moving and erasing the effect (for example, FIG. 15-35 (G). )-As shown in FIGS. 15-35 (H), 15-36 (I), and 15-36 (J), the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the player side after it has a crack and explodes. (Hidden part),
After the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deleted, the specific effect corresponding display (for example, "x2", "x3", "x3" suggesting that the N + 1th variable display is executed. It is further provided with a specific effect-compatible display means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 14) capable of displaying (display such as × 4).
The specific effect-compatible display means can move and erase the specific effect-compatible display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-37, display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. The part that is hidden after being moved toward the player side),
The effect identification information in the N + 1th variable display becomes visible between the time when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deleted and the time when the specific effect corresponding display is deleted (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-37 (O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 14, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the effect of the notification effect and the display corresponding to the specific effect can be enhanced, and the effect identification information becomes visible before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased, so that the variable display is restarted. Can be easily recognized by the player.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
The notice effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect display processing during variable display shown in FIG. 14) that can execute the advance notice effect for notifying that the advantageous state is likely to be obtained by using the effect identification information. Part)
The advance notice effect execution means limits the execution of the advance notice effect when the specific effect corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-3, as the first variable display start number notification effect, " When the display of "x2", "x3", and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the part that restricts the execution of the advance notice effect),
The gaming machine according to the form 15, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to easily recognize that the variable display is restarted by executing the advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
Both the movement of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the movement of the specific effect corresponding display are movements toward the player who is playing the game (for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and the game is played. The part that is moved and displayed toward the player side and the part where the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4" is moved and displayed toward the player side),
The gaming machine according to Form 15 or Form 16, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the impression given to the player can be enhanced, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
The special effect (for example, the blast shown in the modified example 193SG-4) that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed. A special effect executing means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a visibility-inhibiting image such as an image) is provided.
The specific effect executing means makes it possible to visually recognize the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to see by the special effect (for example, variant 193SG). As shown in -4, the part that executes revariable display after hiding the visibility-impaired image),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 17, characterized in that.
According to this feature, before the display including the effect identification information corresponding to the resumption of the variable display is started, a special effect that makes the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) difficult to see is executed. It can be easily understood that the variable display is restarted.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
An image display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the variable display of the effect identification information and the effect display of each effect, and
A plate material provided on the player side of the image display means and having transparency so that the player can visually recognize the display of the image display means, and the special image can be displayed by emitting light from the outer peripheral side surface. A light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in the modified example 193SG-4) and
With
In the special effect, the special effect executing means makes it difficult to visually recognize the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the player displays the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 by displaying the visibility-inhibiting image on the light guide plate. Parts that are difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to Form 18, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, the impression of the player can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is the specific effect after the predetermined timing. The moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the display image is different from the moving speed of the effect identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-33). The moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the data switching timing is V3),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 19, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is before or after a predetermined timing at which the temporary stop is temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined position before the predetermined timing is determined. After the predetermined timing, the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in the modified example 193SG-5). Even if the continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous symbol returns to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once starting to move downward of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5 are provided. The part that makes the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern different from the movement speed when returning to the part),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 20, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the movement is before passing the predetermined position or returning after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, the suggestion effect executing means restricts the display of the effect display (for example, variant example 193SG). As shown in −5, when the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5, the concentrated line is not displayed again).
The gaming machine according to the mode 21, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it can be further understood that the movement is a return movement after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is the specific after the temporary stop. The moving speed of the pseudo-linked symbol before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-linked symbol is V1 as shown in FIGS. 15-34, which is different from the moving speed at which the effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-34). However, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is V2),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 1 to Form 19, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The moving direction before the temporary stop of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is different from the moving direction in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves after the temporary stop (for example). , As shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop moves from the upper side to the lower side, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is directed toward the player side (front side). The part that moves),
The gaming machine according to the form 23.
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement is after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent misidentification of the movement.

FIG. 15-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in the feature unit 193SG. As shown in FIG. 15-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is provided with a drive motor (not shown), and can be operated by the effect control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. Further, the second movable body LED 193SG034 for causing the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light is built in the second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 15-2 (A), the second movable body 193SG033 in the non-operating state is arranged at a lower position (evacuation position) of the image display device 5 between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. Since most of the second movable body 193SG033 is concealed by the game board 2 at the retracted position, it is difficult for the player to see.

The second movable body 193SG033 in the feature unit 193SG is shown in FIG. 15-2 as a jackpot notification when the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect, which will be described later, are executed during the variable display, and during the reach effect of the super reach. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Of these, when the temporary stop notification effect is executed and when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 15-2 (B), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the image display device 5. While moving (moving) to the first effect position, which is the front position, when executing the jackpot notification in the reach effect of the super reach, the second movable body 193SG003 is as shown in FIG. 15-2 (C). It moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second effect position, which is the front position of the image display device 5 and above the first effect position.

Although not particularly shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first effect position or the second effect position returns to the retracted position from the first effect position or the second effect position according to the elapse of a predetermined period. It has become.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect, so that a part of the second movable body 193SG overlaps with the pseudo-continuous symbol in the front view. (See FIG. 15-35 (F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second effect position is limited to the time when the jackpot notification during the super reach effect is executed. That is, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first effect position is also an operation in which the area overlapping with the pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than the movement from the retracted position to the second effect position.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 (A) to 15-3 (D) and 15-4 (A) to 15-4 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5. , An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 15-3 shows image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIGS. 15-35) in the feature unit 193SG, and FIG. 15-4 shows the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped. It is the image data when it does not stop.

As shown in FIG. 15-3 (A), the image data 1 has a pseudo-continuous symbol (this feature) in the central portion (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. In the section, it is data drawn to display a temporary stop suggestion image suggesting that the symbol (the symbol displayed as “NEXT”) is stopped (temporarily stopped).

The pseudo-ream symbol in the feature unit 193SG is a special symbol that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative symbol. This is a symbol in which a revariable display (pseudo-continuous effect) of a decorative symbol is executed by temporarily stopping the symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is a symbol displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. It may be.

Further, in the present feature unit 193SG, a form in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is used as a special symbol displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect is illustrated as a part of the decorative symbol. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol displayed as a part of the variable display even during the period during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect together with the normal decorative symbol.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is to be a symbol different from the decorative symbol, the normal decorative symbol (the symbol of the numbers "1" to "9" of the main feature portion) is temporarily stopped at the central portion of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol to a pseudo-ream symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 (B) and 15-4 (A), in the image data 2, the pseudo-continuous symbol described above is directed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. The data is drawn to display the movement display of the image, and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol, the image display device 5 is replaced with the pseudo-continuous symbol from above to below. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in this feature unit 193SG).

Further, the image data 2 displays the swing display of the decorative symbol in each of the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, and does not display the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is also image data for displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 15-4 (B), the image data 3 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 (C) and 15-4 (C), the image data 4 is displayed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display) of the image display device 5. This is data drawn to display a concentrated line toward the area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 15-3 and 15-4, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in the image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Although not particularly shown, the image data in the feature unit 193SG includes not only the image data 1 to the image data 4 but also the image data 5 drawn to display the background image in the image display device 5. .. The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4. That is, in the feature unit 193SG, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer data among the images displayed on the image display device 5.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 15-3 (D), the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the upper side to the lower side of the pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the image data 4. The image based on the image data (concentrated line) is displayed with priority, and the image based on the image data 1 (temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol, as shown in FIG. 15-4 (D), the image based on the image data 3 (from the central portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The downward movement display) is displayed with priority over the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 4, and the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the upper side to the lower side of the decorative pattern) is the image data. The image based on 3 and the image based on the image data 4 are displayed with priority over the image.

The transmittance of the concentrated line in the feature unit 193SG is set to be high (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 15-3 (C) and 15-4 (D), during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the player can see the decorative symbol, the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the temporary stop suggestion through the concentrated line. The image is visible.

In particular, in the feature unit 193SG, while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 15-3 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped. Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIGS. 15-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop. The image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops (FIG. 15-3) is switched to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 15-4 does not temporarily stop (FIG. 15-4).

FIG. 15-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 193SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 15-5 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determined result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 15-5 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a winning judgment result, a judgment result of a big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability), and a small hit. Is. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 15-5 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 15-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 15-6, in the feature unit 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software to obtain random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a part may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 15-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 193SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 193SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 193SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 193SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 193SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 15-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol that becomes The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 193SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 193SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 15-8 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 193SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 193SG will be described with reference to FIG. 15-8 (B). In the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A" and "Probability change big hit B" that are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and high accuracy low base state where high accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the big hit game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot. Further, in the big hit game by the "probability change big hit C", the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is executed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 second), which is a high-speed opening jackpot. It should be noted that the probability variation control and the time saving control are not executed during the big hit game of any of the big hit types.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 193SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

That is, in this feature unit 193SG, when it is determined to be "probability variation big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 15-9). As a result of the variable display, the chance eye is stopped and displayed, and since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 are used. Since it is not possible to distinguish between the "probability change jackpot C" in which the probability variation control is executed and the "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the probability variation control being executed, the probability variation jackpot C After the big hit game or the small hit game is completed, it is possible to continue the game while expecting the player to execute the probability change control.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A and the probabilistic jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 193SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 15-9 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG. In this feature unit 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 193SG provides two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and the normal reach fluctuation pattern may be set to 1. It may be only the type. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 15-9, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 193SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Further, the normal reach variation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect that temporarily stops and re-variablely displays the decorative symbol during the variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect that executes the pseudo-continuous effect once during the variable display. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the feature unit 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. ..

In addition, in this feature unit 193SG, since the jackpot expectation that the variable display result becomes "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern are set. The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG, the higher the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 15-10 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 193SG. In this feature unit 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-10, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super) It is decided from the reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times jackpot fluctuation pattern). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1-time jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 3 times jackpot fluctuation pattern) ) And decide.

As shown in FIG. 15-10, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%. PB1-4 is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach at a higher rate than when there is a non-probability jackpot. It has become. Furthermore, paying attention to the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect, when the variable display result is the probabilistic jackpot A or the probabilistic jackpot B, more pseudo-continuous effects are generated during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. It is easier to execute. Therefore, in the feature unit 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous production.

If the variable display result is a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation). Pattern) is decided. That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the deviation pattern determination table A, the fluctuation patterns are set to PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production one-time out-of-range fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 loss fluctuation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern of two misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PA2-4 (variation pattern of three misses of super reach pseudo-continuous production).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. It is determined from (non-reach out-of-time shortening variation pattern) and PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time variation pattern).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 193SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display is executed at a high rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1). While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 15-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 193SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 15-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 193SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 193SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 193SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 193SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194. The reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 193SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage. A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the feature unit 193SG, whether or not the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (FIG. 12) is undecided. That is, the display pattern is undecided because the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold storage number notification command are newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start prize. The display undecided flag indicating the above and the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set, respectively, corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A of the feature unit 193SG, a storage area can be stored so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Is secured for each storage area (entry). In the command analysis process (FIG. 15-18), the effect restriction flag is a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a number of reserved memories, although a start prize is generated at the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. If the notification command is not received within the first hold storage number notification waiting time or the second hold storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later, it is a flag indicating that the entry is not the target of the pre-reading notice effect.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) Or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D and the second reserved storage display area 193SG5U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 193SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the command buffer 193SG194A received at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 15-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved first special figures is not the upper limit value in step 193 SGS 102 (step 193 SGS 102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (step). 193SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 193 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 193 SGS 105 (step 193 SGS 105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (step). 193SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (step 193SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 193SGS110, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 193 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the process of step 193SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 15-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 193 SGS112 of FIG. 15-13 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 193SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 5, FIG. 15-14) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111, FIG. 15-15 in FIG. 5), which will be described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 193SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like, thereby causing the pachinko gaming machine. The current gaming state in 1 is specified (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 193SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 15-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 15-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the big hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 15-7. 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 15-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 193SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 193SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 193SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 193SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 193SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance. Among these deviation pattern determination tables A to C, the deviation pattern determination table A is used. For example, 498 (about 50%) judgment values from 0 to 497 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take, and the fluctuation pattern for deviation is assigned. In the judgment table B, 598 judgment values (about 60%) from 0 to 597 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the judgment value is for deviation. In the variation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values (about 70%) from 0 to 697 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 (about 10%) determination values from 898 to 997 in the range that the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern of the super reach. Is assigned.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 193SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is in the variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 15-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 193 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and the step Proceed to 193SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether or not the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

When the determined jackpot type is probability variation jackpot A or probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step). 193SGS136), the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

When the determined jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; N), that is, when the determined jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C, the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set. (Step 193SGS137), the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are executed. (Step 193SGS138), the variation category according to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 is determined by using the numerical data indicating the above. In this feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 193SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

15-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 15-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step 193SGS141). The second special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit may be read, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

When the second special figure hold storage number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), the hold data stored corresponding to the hold number "1" in the second special figure hold storage unit. As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 193SGS142, the second special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the second special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the second special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure hold storage unit are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 193SGS144), the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step 193SGS145). .. The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, if the game control counter setting unit reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage counter and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. As described above, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 193SGS141 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to the one executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, for example, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

When the number of first special figure hold storage is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the hold number "1". As a result, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step 193SGS146, the first special figure holding memory number and the total holding storage number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting 1 from the first special figure holding storage number count value and the total holding storage number count value and updating. The data in the first special figure reservation storage unit is updated as well as being updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the hold storage unit of the first special figure are shown. The pending data is shifted up one entry at a time (step 193SGS147).

After that, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designated buffer to "1" (step 193SGS148), the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 15-7 is used as a table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is "big hit" or "missing". Select and set table 1. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing". , It is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "missing" (step 193SGS150a). In this step 193SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) in which the probability change flag is on, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is in the high probability state (probability change state). ) Corresponds to the range of 1000 to 12180, it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is not applicable, it is determined to be "missing". In the low probability state where the probability change flag is off, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "big hit", and if not, it is judged as "missing". judge.

As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , Step 193 In the process of SGS150a, the special figure display result using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to set "big hit", when the game state is in the high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be "big hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low probability state.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "big hit" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the big hit flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 15-8 (A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and the "non-probability variation jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table It is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be selected according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probability variation jackpot B", and "probability variation jackpot C" is matched (step 193SGS154). ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a probabilistic state in which the player has a higher advantage than the time-saving state. It will be decided before the definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193SGS155), the determined jackpot type can be set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" corresponding to non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probability variation A" corresponding to probability variation jackpot A, it is set to "1". If it is "probability variation B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probability variation C" corresponding to probability variation jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is not a "big hit" (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 15-7 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure is compared. It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small hit" (step 193SGS150c). In step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the first special figure. When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" by using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special figure display result is "small hit" (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, as a result of pre-determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state (the small hit flag is turned on). A definite special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of (whether or not it is done), and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, a special symbol indicating the "-" symbol, which is an outlier symbol, is set as the finalized special symbol in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "out of place". Further, when it is determined in step 193SGS150a that the special figure display result is "big hit", when the big hit type in step 193SGS154 is "probability variation big hit A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set to a confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as the finalized special symbol. When the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. When the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the finalized special symbol. Further, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", the special symbol indicating the symbol "2" which is the small hit symbol is set as the finalized special symbol. It should be noted that these confirmed special symbols are examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated. ..

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step 193SGS158), The normal processing of the special symbol is terminated. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

15-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 15-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether or not the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "probability variation jackpot C", that is, "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "non-probability variation jackpot B". In the case of either "probability variation jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the variable pattern determination table A for jackpot is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" or "probability variation jackpot B". , The jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the specified jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the determination in step 193SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). When the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), the special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game state is changed to the probabilistic state or the time saving state by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in (step 193SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types (step 193SGS168; Y). Step 193 SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time reduction control is not in progress, that is, when the time reduction flag is not turned on (step 193SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the hold storage number counter of the fluctuation special figure provided in the game control counter setting unit. Is specified, and it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is used as a table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

Further, when the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172). ).

When the number of reserved memory of the specified variation special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. And set (step 193SGS173).

Further, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is not 3, that is, when the number of reserved memory of the specified variable chart is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), any one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used. As the table to be used for determining the above, the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 193SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 193 SGS 164, step 193 SGS 165, step 193 SGS 167, step 193 SGS 169, step 193 SGS 1711, step 193 SGS 173, and step 193 SGS 174, for example, a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation. By referring to any of the selected (set) jackpot variation pattern determination table, special hit variation pattern determination table, or loss variation pattern determination table A to D based on the numerical data indicating Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the variable display mode is determined by the process of step 193SGS175 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach". That is, the process of step 193 SGS 170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is "off".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 193SGS175, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the process of step 193SGS176, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol are made (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the first hold storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit uses the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. It is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 193SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the finalized special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 193SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The specified command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is first transmitted, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern The command may be transmitted in the order of the designated command, the game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

FIG. 15-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing in step S112 to the ON state to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbol (step 193SGS180). When the variation special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is changed. When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and when the jackpot flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the jackpot flag is further turned on. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 193SGS190b). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (step S118), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn it off (step) if the probability change flag and the time saving flag are turned on. 193SGS184), hit start 1 designated command (probability variation jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variation jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variation jackpot C) according to the type of jackpot stored in the effect control board 12. ), Set to send the hit start 4 designated command (non-probability change) (step 193SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times in the case of non-probability big hit or probable big hit A, 5 times in the case of probable change big hit B, and 2 times in the case of probable change big hit C) is set in the large winning opening opening counter. (Step 193 SGS 188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". If the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step). 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196 and the value of the time reduction counter. When is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag and turning it off (step 193SGS194), it corresponds to the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low accuracy and low base) (step 193SGS195), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and then the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIG. 15-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the jackpot end display time (big hit end display time) on the image display device 5 on the jackpot end display timer. Is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

When the stored jackpot type is not a non-probability change jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the probability variation flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the probability variation jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 193SGS207). After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set in the time saving number counter by executing step 193SGS211 and step 193SGS212. After that, the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probabilistic change flag and the time reduction flag turned on (step 193SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is special. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 15-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 15-18, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. Determine if there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no reception command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set (set) in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225, which will be described later, has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237), if the waiting time for notifying the first or second reserved storage number has not elapsed (step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process ends. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second is before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry in which the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command is not yet stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a reception command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 193 SGS 222). Then, when it is the first start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192. Just do it.

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 193SGS222 (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 193SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 193SGS224 (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 193SGS226). If the reception command is not a symbol designation command in step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the receive command is not a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, when it is the first hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS229). ..

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). Then, when it is the second hold storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second hold storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time counting operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). ..

Then, after executing any of the processes of step 193SGS229 and step 193SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the effect restriction flag is turned on (step). 193SGS232).

When the reception command is a symbol designation command in step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; Y), when the reception command is a variable category command in step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; Y), or step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes of, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 15-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 193SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 193SGS230 (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, when the first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command or the second hold before the set first or second hold storage number notification waiting time has elapsed. When the hold storage number notification command is not received (step 193SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect restriction flag of the corresponding unstored entry is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to the process of step 193SGS221.

FIG. 15-19 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the effect pattern (display pattern of the hold storage display) of the pre-read notice effect together with the presence / absence of the pre-read notice effect in the pre-read notice setting process (S161). Next, a hold display update process for updating the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 193SG005D and the second hold storage display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is performed. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIG. 15-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 15-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not the variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS240b). As shown in FIGS. 15-29 (E), 15-30 (L), and 15-31 (S), the first variable display start count notification effect starts re-variable display as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1. Further, in step 193SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start number notification effect is being executed may be determined by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), the step By proceeding to 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed during the execution period of the first variable display start number notification effect.

In step 193SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the start winning command buffer 193SG194A. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning, depending on whether or not there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (set to "1") (step 193SGS242). ..

If there is no entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 193SGS242; N), the read-ahead notice setting process is finished, and if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on (step 193SGS242; Y). , It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the 4th symbol designation or the 6th symbol designation command, that is, whether or not the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 193SGS243a). When the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is displayed. , Set to hold display flag. That is, the pre-reading advance notice effect is not executed for the hold memory that becomes the probability variation big hit C or the small hit.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not the symbol designation command indicating the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the command indicating that the symbol designation command is off. (Step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either probabilistic jackpot A, probabilistic jackpot B, or non-probabilistic jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the entry is concerned. The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of (step 193SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit and the jackpot type specified in step 193SGS244, the jackpot advance notice (not shown) is shown. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-21 (A), the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. ..

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area 193SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold memory display is a white star (☆) and the first hold memory display area 193SG5D or the second hold memory display is displayed. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

If the variable display result is a jackpot other than the probabilistic jackpot C, the pre-reading notice effect may not be decided to be non-executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided as the display pattern (notice type). The display pattern (notice type) of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A", the display pattern α determines the ratio of the display pattern β determined as the display pattern (notice type). It is set higher than the ratio to be set. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" or "non-probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpot A is increased, and the player's expectation of becoming the probability variation jackpot A can be increased.

In this feature unit 193SG, when the variable display result is a "big hit" other than the probabilistic big hit C, the hold memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-reading notice effect. The display pattern of either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in the white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot C. Even in the case of a "big hit" other than the above, a case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "missing".

Further, in step 193SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 193SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a "non-reach" variation pattern category, and if it is C601H, it is a "super reach" variation pattern category. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 193 SGS247, an deviation (not shown) is shown. By referring to the time look-ahead notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the look-ahead notice effect is executed (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15-21 (B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are determined according to the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 193SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area is represented by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on the 193SG5U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold. It is displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold storage display area 193SG5U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 15-21 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the variable pattern category. The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than when is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Further, when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-21 (A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), and the pre-reading notice effect is not determined. The ratio at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is determined by the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”. It is set higher than the ratio to be set.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variation A)" and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A". Since the ratio of the above is increased, the expectation of the player can be increased.

After the execution of step 193SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 193SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 193SGS249).

After the execution of step 193SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 193SGS249 (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step). 193SGS250), step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). After that, the hold display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. NS. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is used according to the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A after the shift. The hold display of the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U provided at the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the flag value of the hold display flag is When it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. It is displayed in the mode. If the number of hold storages in the second special figure is two, for example, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to the flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. As a mode, for example, the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of “◯”, and the hold storage display of 1 is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U in the display mode of “☆”. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each of the reserved storage displays corresponds to the flag value set in the corresponding reserved display flag of the reserved storage. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the hold storage display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (in the feature unit 193SG, the center direction of the screen) as the hold memory is reduced (consumed).

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the receive command buffer 193SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 193SG5D and the second hold storage display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 193SG5D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U.

The feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 193SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 193SG5U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, in the present feature unit 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of the start winning in step 193SGS242, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 193SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the pre-read notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 15-22 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 193SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 193SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In the feature unit 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as stop symbols. It is a symbol, and a combination (outlier symbol) other than the above-mentioned chance eyes is determined. If the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle symbol is medium. Determine the combination of reach loss (missing symbol) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect during the variable display (step 193SGS277). When the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), the notice effect determination process for the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect). Is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). .. The temporary stop notification effect is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decorative design is temporarily stopped by updating to the background image according to the number of times (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the number of temporary stops is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third). Is a production that informs the player.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193 SGS281). When the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193SGS281; Y), the process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

When the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. It is determined from 1.5 seconds (step 193SGS283). Then, the process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and the fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

Further, when the variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display (step 193SGS277; N), the notice effect determination process for the variable display that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect is executed and the variable display is in progress. Whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed are determined (step 193 SGS285). After deciding whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, the process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected by any of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 193SGS288). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 193SGS289). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by -1 each time the effect process is executed during the variable display, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer is not timered out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer is timered out, the process is switched to the next process data, and the next process is performed again. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by starting the timer and controlling the effect device according to the absence of the next process data. When the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the advance notice effect in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the advance notice effect execution process for executing the advance notice effect in the variable display during effect process. ..

Next, the flow of the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 15-23 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, first, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped after reaching the reach. The suggestion temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. The temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG is such that after the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Is a production that performs variable display at a lower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop is executed and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. If the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends when the first temporary stop timing B is reached, and the pseudo stop notification effect is simulated. Temporary stop of the continuous symbol is executed, and the temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. As shown in FIG. 15-23 (A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B have the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has an effect period of 1.5 seconds and 2 Regardless of which of the seconds is determined, it is set to always end at a specific timing.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the revariable display notification effect is executed. In the revariable display notification effect, in addition to outputting the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the image of the character corresponding to the number of revariable display times on the image display device 5 (character A if the number of revariable display times is the first). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed by displaying the image of the character B for the second time and the image of the character C for the third time.

The first revariable display is executed during the revariable display notification effect. When the revariable display notification effect is completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the revariable display notification effect. In the first variable display start count notification effect, the variable display count of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image of the color corresponding to the variable display count is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production to display. That is, in the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the first revariable display, "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and blue effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the second revariable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start count notification effect corresponding to the third revariable display, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and red is displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. This is an effect that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start number notification effect. The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect of displaying the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the revariable display number on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect.

After the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol.

As shown in FIG. 15-23 (B), when the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display. Similar to the case where the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 15-23 (A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-ream effect is executed once during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect after the reach is reached and the first pseudo-ream effect, respectively. Temporary stop and revariable display of the symbol, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, second variable display start number notification effect, and first temporary stop and revariable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again, and the second temporary stop and revariable display of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop notification effect, the revariable display notification effect, the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed. Will be done. Then, after the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again and the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the reach effect of the super reach is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed in the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). When the first temporary stop notification effect is executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also set in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). Is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second revariable display notification effect, an image of a character (character B) different from that of the first revariable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Further, in the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the first variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x3" ("x3" having a size smaller than that of the second first variable display start number notification effect in the second second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15-25, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 15- Similar to the case where the variation pattern shown in 23 (B) is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect after reaching the reach and the pseudo-continuous pattern up to the second time, respectively. Temporary stop and revariable display, temporary stop notification effect, revariable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start number notification effect are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number notification effect is completed, the reach is reached again, and the third temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop notification effect, the revariable display notification effect, and the third 1 The variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and further, the reach effect of super reach is executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also set during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also performed in the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). It is executed in 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third revariable display notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of a character (character C) different from the first and second revariable display effects. Further, in the third variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 includes the second variable display start number notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect. Is different, "x4" ("x4" having a size smaller than that of the third first variable display start number notification effect in the third second variable display start number notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-26, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop is first performed. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, the temporary stop notification effect ends when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. .. That is, in the variable display executed by the special temporary stop notification effect, the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification are different from the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed). The production period is unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification effect, the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is executed without executing the revariable display notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect. Further, after a while, the second variable display start number notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, as the first revariable display notification effect, the image of the character (character A) is displayed or as the first variable display start number notification effect. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start number notification effect has a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect "x2". Is only displayed

Then, after the first temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbol, special After the temporary stop notification effect and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the second variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 15-23 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 15-27, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 15-26. Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and revariable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the third decorative symbol is provisionally displayed. The stop and revariable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the reach effect of the super reach is further executed.

As the third variable display start number notification effect, as in FIG. 15-23 (B), the image display device 5 displays "x4" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect. Is executed.

Although some of them have been described above, as shown in FIGS. 15-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature unit 193SG is a speaker 8L of the temporary stop notification sound from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , It is an effect of notifying the player that the decorative symbol has been temporarily stopped by outputting from 8R, and is an effect executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is the number of temporary stops of the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. By updating to the background image according to the above (the first special background image if the number of temporary stops is the first, the second special background image if the second is the second, and the third special background image if the number of temporary stops is the third), the decorative design is temporarily stopped. It is a production that notifies the player. The special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the update timing to the next special background image or the end of the variable display, while the temporary stop notification. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as a part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an image of a character corresponding to the number of re-variable display on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (if the re-variable display number is the first time, the character). This is an effect of notifying the player that the revariable display of the decorative pattern is executed by displaying the image of A (the image of character B for the second time and the image of character C for the third time). The effect period of the revariable display notification effect (the display period of the character image on the image display device 5 and the output period of the revariable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the revariable display is executed. Seconds. As described above, in the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the higher the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (the number of times the temporary stop / re-variable display is executed), the higher the jackpot expectation is set. Regarding the display notification effect, the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start number notification effect is for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the revariable display is started as a pseudo continuous effect. This is an effect, and the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including these revariable displays is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second variable display In the start number notification effect, "x3" is displayed, and in the third variable display start number notification effect, "x4") is displayed. The effect period of the first variable display start number notification effect is 1 second regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , The number of times that the variable display of the decorative symbol including the revariable display is started in the image display device 5 (“× 2” in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display start number notification In the production, "x3" is displayed for the third time as well as "x4" in the first variable display start number notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start number notification effect. The effect period of the second variable display start number notification effect is 2 seconds regardless of the variable display number of the decorative symbol including the re-variable display.

FIG. 15-29 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 15-22. In the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193 SGS301). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to execute the pseudo-continuous effect. The production is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-29 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 20%. The execution of the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%.

The cut-in notice effect is an effect in which the cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 15-29 (F), and the group notice effect is an effect shown in FIG. 15-29 (G). As shown, this is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed so as to cross the display area of the image display device 5.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 30%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a rate of 0%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be the highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo-ream). Big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the effect: Cut-in notice effect + group notice effect> group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 193SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect (determines the execution of at least one of the cut-in advance notice effect and the group advance notice effect) (step 193SGS303). When the execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been decided (step 193 SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) is terminated, and when the execution of any of the advance notice effects is decided (step 193 SGS303; N). Y) stores the determined advance notice effect, sets the advance notice effect start waiting timer, and ends the advance notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIGS. 15-32, the executable period of these advance notice effects overlaps with the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start number notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are taken during the revariable display notification effect period and the first variable display start count notification effect period. The production is executed in duplicate.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the execution of any of the notice effects is decided in the notice effect determination process (for executing the pseudo continuous effect), the same notice effect is executed in all the revariable display notification effect periods. (See FIGS. 15-29 to 15-31).

FIG. 15-30 (A) is a flowchart showing a notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 15-22. In the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193 SGS311). Then, a random number value for determining the execution of the advance notice effect is extracted, and the random number value and the table for determining the advance notice effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed and the advance notice to be executed. The production is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15-30 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is 30%. Will be decided at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the group notice effect will be decided at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is off and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 40%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 35%, and the group. The execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 25%. If the variable display result is off and the normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach is off), the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the group. The execution of the notice production is decided at a rate of 2%.

That is, in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed in the feature unit 193SG, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only the group notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect is set. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when only is executed (big hit expectation regarding the notice effect in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: group notice effect> cut-in effect> non-execution).

After the execution of step 193SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 193SGS313). When the execution of the advance notice effect is not decided (step 193SGS313; N), the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo continuous effect) is ended, and when the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (step 193SGS313; Y), the advance notice effect is determined. The determined advance notice effect is stored, and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the advance notice effect determination process (for when the pseudo continuous effect is not executed) (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

When the advance notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is not executed, the advance notice effect may be executed in any period during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

FIG. 15-31 (A) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect in step 193SG280 in FIG. 15-22. In step 193SG280 in FIG. 15-22, if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach big hit), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (executes the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20%. It is decided, and the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is off (super reach is off), the non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed (execution of the special temporary stop notification effect). (Non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the image is displayed. When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only the temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R according to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol; The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the temporary stop notification effect is executed (the jackpot expectation in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: special temporary stop notification effect execution> special temporary stop notification effect not executed). ..

Further, as described above, paying attention to the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image corresponds to the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The first special background image is only displayed on the display device 5, but when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 responds to the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern. After the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (first special background image). The third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (from the second special background image). (Updated to the 3rd special background image).

That is, with respect to the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect, the higher the number of pseudo continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation of a big hit is set. Therefore, the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is set. Is set to have the highest jackpot expectation when is the third special background image, and the jackpot expectation is lowest when the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image. Big hit expectation for the special background image that is set (in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect) that is finally displayed on the image display device 5: 3rd special background image> 2nd special background image> 1st special background image ).

FIG. 15-31 (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 15-22. In step 193SG283 in FIG. 15-22, if the variable display result is a big hit, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. The temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds) is determined at the ratio of. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the jackpot expectation regarding the production period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect). : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds)> Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is limited to this. It may be uniquely determined in one period, or it may be determined from three or more periods.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which a longer temporary stop notification effect period has a higher expectation of a big hit than a shorter temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, a shorter temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation of a big hit than a longer temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R can output BGM (musical music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during variable display excluding the revariable display notification effect period. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a revariable display notification sound, and a first variable display start number notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification effect period, and the revariable display notification sound is output only during the revariable display notification effect period. The 1 variable display start number notification sound is output only during the first variable display start number notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R can output a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when the execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided, and the group notice effect sound is decided to execute the group notice effect. If so, it is output only during the group notice effect execution period.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 15-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the revariable display notification effect period from the speakers 8L and 8R. While the output of the BGM is limited, the output of the BGM from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the revariable display notification effect period. Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period, two types of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while during the first variable display start number notification effect period, the speakers 8L and 8R output. In addition to the first variable display start count notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound are output.

Next, a display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 from above to below in the image display device 5. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol toward is executed. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. From the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not drawn as the image data 2, that is, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol as the image data 2 is hidden.

Further, from the middle of the movement display of the speed V1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1. The temporary stop suggestion image is displayed from the middle of the movement display of the speed V1 of the pseudo-continuous symbol described above to the period of the display image data switching timing, but is not displayed (hidden) in other periods.

Further, immediately before the display image data switching timing, the display of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the central portion of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3. The pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by the image data 3 does not move until the display image data switching timing (speed 0), but from the display image data switching timing, the speed V1 described above is directed downward from the central portion of the image display device 5. The movement display is performed at a speed V3, which is faster than that. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 is hidden when the pseudo-continuous symbol moves out of the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, from the display image data switching timing, the moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol from the upper side to the lower side in the image display device 5 is executed by drawing with the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3> V2> V1) which is faster than the speed V1 and slower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbol continues until the start timing of the reach effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The display of the concentrated line is displayed at D2, which is a higher density than D1, after the density (display density) is displayed at D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to a certain period. That is, the number of concentrated lines to be displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is displayed again at the density D1 from the display image data switching timing and then disappears.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the display image data switching timing, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") is lower than the state before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: high). (Visibility: Medium). Further, as the density of the concentrated lines changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: low).

Further, from the display image data switching timing to the display end timing of the concentrated line, since the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher than that when the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2. Higher (visibility: medium). Then, after the display end timing of the concentrated line, the display of the concentrated line is completed (hidden), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is the highest (visibility: high).

As shown in FIGS. 15-34, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2 from the upper side to the lower side in the image display device 5. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol of is executed. The movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIGS. 15-33 does not temporarily stop. It is the same. Further, after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the temporary stop notification effect is executed, but during the temporary stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, it becomes hidden.

Further, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. In the display of the concentrated line, the density of the concentrated line (display density) is displayed in D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). , It will be hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated lines are displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 4. The display of the concentrated line is displayed at D2, which is a higher density than D1, after the density (display density) is displayed at D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to a certain period. That is, the number of concentrated lines to be displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is hidden from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is non-stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the display image data switching timing, so that the left and right decorations are displayed. The visibility of the symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right") is lower than the state before the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect (visibility: high). (Visibility: Medium). Further, as the density of the concentrated lines changes from D1 to D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower. (Visibility: low). Further, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the display of the concentrated line is completed (not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIGS. 15-34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the decorative symbol is drawn by drawing the image data 1. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbol is then switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 15-35). The effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 193SG is an image in which the transmittance is set to 0%.

That is, in the temporary stop notification effect period, once the concentrated line is hidden, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher than that in the temporary stop suggestion effect execution period (visibility: medium), but the image display device. The left and right decorative symbols become invisible due to the display of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the entire display area of 5 (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing at which the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the image data 2 ends, the speed V2 toward the player side (front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) of the pseudo-continuous symbol is also drawn by drawing the image data 2. The movement display is executed. At this time, since the movement display (enlarged display) of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible again.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 The moving display of the decorative pattern is not executed (variable display).

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-35 to 15-47.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (A) to 15-35 (C), a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display. After that, the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C of the "left" and "right" to reach the reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from above to below at a speed V1 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of the normal reach that does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (D). At speed V2, it moves below the image display device and disappears. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4 and PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 15-35 (E). At the same time, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (F) and 15-35 (G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (G) and 15-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 15-36 (I) and 15-36 (J), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-37 (K) to 15-37 (P), the first revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the cut-in notice effect overlaps with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. A group notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the blue effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits blue light.

The "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start number notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5 and then displayed in a larger size and is not displayed. It becomes a display (see FIGS. 15-37 (O) and 15-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, the second movable body 193SG033 ends its blue light emission, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position. Further, as the first second variable display start number notification effect, an image of "x2" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5.

After a while after the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, the decorative symbol display areas of "left" and "right" are shown in FIGS. 15-38 (R) to 15-38 (T). After the decorative symbol stopped (swinged and stopped) in 5L and 5R to reach the reach, the pseudo-continuous symbol was moved from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as the second temporary stop suggestion effect. It moves at speed V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 out of the normal reach or the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 of the normal reach jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect only once, as shown in FIG. 15-38 (U). The pseudo-continuous symbol moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 without being temporarily stopped and is hidden. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 15-38 (V) As shown in the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (W) and 15-38 (X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the green light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-38 (X) and 15-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 15-39 (Z) and 15-39 (a), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-40 (b) to 15-40 (h), the second revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the green effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits green light.

The "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 and then displayed in a larger size. It becomes a display (see FIGS. 15-40 (f) and 15-40 (g)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the second second variable display start number notification effect, "x3" having a size smaller than that of the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

After a while after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, the decorative symbol display areas of "left" and "right" are shown in FIGS. 15-41 (e) to 15-41 (g). After the decorative symbol stopped (swinged and stopped) in 5L and 5R to reach the reach, the pseudo-continuous symbol was moved from the top to the bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C as the third temporary stop suggestion effect. It moves at speed V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) of the image display device 5. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 with the lapse of a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 out of super reach or a fluctuation pattern PB1-3 of super reach jackpot that executes the pseudo-continuous effect only twice, as shown in FIG. 15-41 (h). In addition, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves below the image display device at a speed of V2 without being temporarily stopped and is hidden. At this time, the density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variation pattern (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice or more, FIG. 15-41 (i) As shown in the above, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol. In addition, the concentrated line is hidden. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (j) and 15-41 (k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to the display in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and the red light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-41 (k) and 15-41 (l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol has a plurality of symbols. The evacuation is displayed. After that, an image in which the pseudo-series symbol displaying these plurality of cracks explodes is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 15-42 (m) and 15-42 (n), the pseudo-series symbol is configured. An image is displayed in which the characters (in the case of the feature unit 193SG, each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that the pseudo-continuous production is executed) are diffused and move toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 15-43 (o) to 15-43 (u), the third revariable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, as a revariable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and the revariable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group will overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. Notice production is executed.

Then, when the revariable display notification effect is completed, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start number notification effect, and both left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. The display of the red effect image is started at. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position again and emits red light.

The "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third variable display start count notification effect is displayed in a larger size after being displayed on the image display device 5 once. (See FIGS. 15-43 (s) and 15-43 (t)).

When the first variable display start number notification effect is completed, as the third second variable display start number notification effect, "x4" having a size smaller than the first variable display start number notification effect in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Image is displayed.

Here, the time when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15-44 (A) and 15-44 (B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-continuous symbol is directed from the upper side to the lower side at the speed V1 in the image display device 5 as described above. The concentrated line is displayed at the density D2. When the pseudo-continuous symbol approaches the temporary stop position as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, the speed V1 is directed from above to below at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative symbol). A pseudo-series symbol (pseudo-series symbol by drawing with image data 3) different from the pseudo-series symbol (pseudo-series symbol drawn with image data 2) that moves in is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-series symbol. NS.

Then, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (C), so that the temporary stop notification is given around the pseudo-ream symbol. The effect image for Lights up in green for a temporary stop and red for the third temporary stop). Further, the concentrated line displayed on the image display device 5 at this time is hidden.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 15-44 (D) and 15-44 (E), the pseudo-continuous symbol in the center of the image display device 5 (Pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol drawn by image data 2) that had been moving from above to downward at speed V1 is displayed. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves downward of the image display device 5 as it is, and is hidden. At the same time, the normal movement display of the decorative symbol is executed from the upper side to the lower side of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the concentrated lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 from the timing when the movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the speed V2 is started (the number of concentrated lines displayed decreases). Then, the concentrated line after the density changes to D1 is hidden after a certain period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 15-44 (F) and 15-44 (G), after the concentrated lines are hidden, the decorations excluding the pseudo-continuous symbols are removed for a while in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. After the variable display is executed on the symbol, the reach effect according to the variable pattern is executed, and finally the decorative symbol indicating the big hit or the miss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature unit 193SG, "medium"). In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the decorative symbols of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of outliers, are stopped). That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of the concentrated line is continued even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentrated line is displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbol stops due to a combination of big hits or misses (more accurately, before the reach effect is started).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIGS. 15-45, the left and right decorative symbols (“right” and “left” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) The displayed decorative pattern) has lower visibility during the temporary stop suggestion effect period than before the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed because the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1 (visibility: low). .. Further, the left and right decorative symbols (decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "right" and "left") are further reduced in visibility by changing to the density D2 of the concentrated lines (visual recognition). Gender: Medium).

Further, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification effect period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo-continuous symbol from the start timing of the temporary stop notification effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol). The visibility is higher during the period during which the temporary stop is suggested than during the period (visibility: medium).

After the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification effect period, the remaining temporary stop notification effect period (the player side of the pseudo-continuous pattern). (Movement display toward) and revariable display It becomes invisible to the player during the notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start number notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to the partial overlap of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The visibility is the same as immediately after the start of (Visibility: Medium).

After that, the left and right decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. (moved toward the player side) so that they cannot be seen by the player. After that, the display of these "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to the small display at the upper left part of the image display device 5, so that the state with the highest visibility (visibility: high). It becomes.

In the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 to 15-37, 15-39 to 15-40, and 15-42 to 15-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect is set. Although the mode in which the execution period of the revariable display notification effect is different (the revariable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these provisional display notification effects are not limited thereto. The execution period of the stop notification effect and the execution period of the revariable display notification effect may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-36 to 15-37, when the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes and is moved to the front side in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol ( For example, the character "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the character as a revariable display notification effect on the back side of a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The display of the image of is started. By doing so, the image of the character is gradually made visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the effect of the effect can be improved, and further, the image is displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to transfer the images that are displayed without any discomfort.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (H) and the like, the feature unit 193SG displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous pattern has a crack in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, and the image itself explodes. Although the display mode has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image containing these cracks and the image exploding may be different from each other. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image in which a ridge is included in the pseudo-continuous pattern, and then displays an image in which smoke or light is generated from the ridge. Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol may be difficult to see from the player by the image of the smoke or light, and an exploding image may be displayed instead of the pseudo-continuous symbol. By doing so, it is possible to transfer the image displayed on the image display device 5 without discomfort.

Next, when it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 15-46 (A) to 15-46 (C), the variable display is started for a while. Become a reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a lower speed (speed V1) than usual in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-effect period ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15-46 (D) to 15-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the image display device 5 starts displaying the first special background image and the first time. The revariable display of the decorative pattern of is started. At this time, if it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is executed in duplicate with the revariable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group notice effect are completed, the first variable display start number notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start number notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 15-47 (I) to 15-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the second temporary stop of the decorative symbol. The image is displayed on the second special background image, and the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, the second second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative pattern is revariably displayed, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the like. The third variable display start number notification effect is executed. Then, the reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-33 and 15-34, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D1 on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect. By doing so, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is reduced, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at the density D2, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is produced by the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the temporary stop. Then, as the temporary stop notification effect, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative symbols invisible, so that the pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to enhance the feeling of exhilaration.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line continues even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol should have been temporarily stopped, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. It becomes easier for the player to recognize that there was no such thing, and the player's disappointment about the fact that the pseudo-ream symbol did not temporarily stop can be alleviated, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the concentrated line is displayed at the density D2 before the switching timing of the display image data, and the switching timing of the display image data is displayed. After that, since the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is higher after the display image data switching timing than before the display image data switching timing. That is, after the switching timing of the display image data, by increasing the transparency of the concentrated line, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, and the attention to the background image is increased through the concentrated line. As a result, it is possible to alleviate the player's disappointment that the pseudo-ream pattern did not temporarily stop.

If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, before the decorative symbol of the combination that becomes a big hit or misses together with the left and right decorative symbols is stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Since the concentrated line is hidden in, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop of the decorative symbol after the pseudo-continuous symbol has not been temporarily stopped is a temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (G) to 15-35 (H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and at the same time, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is cracked and explodes (an image in which the pseudo-continuous symbol moves toward the player side), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed. The display of the explosion can further impress the player that the pseudo-ream symbol has been temporarily stopped.

In particular, in the present feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position as a temporary stop notification effect, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are viewed from the front. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the player is informed that the pseudo-ream symbol has been temporarily stopped while preventing the pseudo-ream symbol from becoming difficult for the player to see due to the second movable body 193SG033. Can make an impression.

In addition, in this feature part 193SG, the form in which the pseudo-continuous symbol explodes is illustrated as an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is deformed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as an example in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is deformed, , The pseudo-continuous symbol may change to the shape of a specific figure (for example, a circle or a triangle), or the size of the pseudo-continuous symbol may be different from that before the temporary stop.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first effect position when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the movable body 32 is placed in the first effect position or a position different from the first effect position in addition to or in place of the second movable body 193SG033, and is viewed from the front. May be moved to a position that overlaps with at least a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (F) and 15-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is displayed before the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. Since it is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden from the image display device 5.

Further, in the variable display of the feature unit 193SG, it is possible to execute the pseudo-ream effect up to three times, and every time the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and the revariable display is executed as these pseudo-ream effects, the first is performed. As the 1 variable display start number notification effect, the image display device 5 displays displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" according to the revariable display number. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-37 (O), when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and becomes the second movable body 193SG033. Since some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are overlapped in the front view, "x2", "x3", and so on according to the variable number of times of display. It is possible to attract attention to the display such as "x4" and improve the effect of the effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-37 (O), 15-40 (f), and 15-43 (s), when "x2" is displayed as the variable display start number notification effect, the second movable is possible. The first variable display start count is obtained by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green when displaying "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red when displaying "x4". It is possible to attract the player's attention to the display of the notification effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

In the feature unit 193SG, when the first variable display start number notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", ". Although a form in which a part of the display such as "x3" or "x4" is overlapped in the front view is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the first variable display start number notification effect is executed. Occasionally, the display of the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, 15-35, and 15-44, as the temporary stop suggestion performance, a concentrated line is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 while displaying a pseudo continuous symbol as a temporary stop suggestion image. Is displayed, so that the display control of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120 becomes easy, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (shown in FIG. 15-3). It is possible to prevent the switching from the image data to the image data shown in FIG. 15-4) to be unnatural. In particular, after the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves downward from the central portion of the image display device 5, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in advance in the central portion of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion image. By setting the image data, the image data can be switched at the display image data switching timing in a different manner that gives the player a feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the gaming machine of the feature unit 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 is drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 as shown in FIGS. 15-3 and 15-4. The data can be combined and the image can be displayed on the image display device 5. In particular, the pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporarily stopped image is drawn as the image data 1 having the highest display priority, and the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is drawn as the image data 2 having a lower display priority than the image data 1, and is temporarily stopped. Since the concentrated line as the stop suggestion effect is drawn as the image data 4 having the lowest display priority, the decorative symbol or pseudo-continuous symbol during moving display (variable display), the pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporary stop suggestion image, and provisional It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the concentrated line as a stop suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-35 (H), 15-36 (I), and 15-36 (J), a pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When the display explodes and moves to the front side, the left and right decorative symbols are invisible to the player, while the first variable display start count notification effect is shown as shown in FIG. 15-37 (O). When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, since the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player, the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect (particularly). The effect of (displaying "x2", etc.) can be enhanced, and the left and right decorative symbols can be visually recognized by the player during the first variable display start count notification effect, so that the revariable display is executed. Can be easily recognized by the player.

Further, a portion in which the pseudo-continuous symbols shown in FIGS. 15-35 (H), 15-36 (I), 15-36 (J) and the like explode and are moved and displayed, and 15-37 (O), The parts where the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" shown in FIGS. 15-37 (P) are moved and displayed are both moved displays (enlarged display) toward the player side. ), Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start number notification effect by the movement display toward the player side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-33, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing is pseudo. Since the moving speed of the continuous symbol is V3, the player decides whether the pseudo continuous symbol is before or after the timing of temporary stop by the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbol (before or after the display image data switching timing). It is possible for the player to easily grasp (whether it will be later).

In this feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing. Although the embodiment is slower than the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the pseudo-ream symbol before the display image data switching timing is the pseudo-ream after the display image data switching timing. It may be faster than the moving speed of the symbol.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15-34, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol is V1, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the timing is V2, the player determines whether the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol is before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol. Can be easily grasped.

In particular, in this feature unit 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 15-34 and 15-35, the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop moves from the upper side to the lower side, but the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is the player. Since it moves toward the side (front side), the player can more easily understand whether it is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol, and the movement display of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be displayed. Misidentification can be prevented.

It should be noted that the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement directions of the pseudo-linkage symbols are different before and after the pseudo-linkage symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-linkage symbol is not limited to this. The moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol may be the same before the temporary stop of the continuous symbol and after the temporary stop. Further, if the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is different from the moving direction of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop, the movement does not have to be toward the player side (front side). good.

In this feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing. Although a slower form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing is displayed. The number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol after the display image data switching timing may be different from the number of display frames for displaying. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the effect period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed) and the display image data switching The period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed after the timing may be different. That is, in the present invention, "the moving speed at which the specific effect identification information (pseudo-ream symbol in the feature unit 193SG) moves is different" means that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-ream symbol is different, and the pseudo-ream is different. The period during which the symbol is displayed (the production period during which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed) is also included.

Although the feature portion 193SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention, the present invention includes them. ..

For example, in the feature unit 193SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 (the decorative symbol display area 5C of the “middle”) by displaying the concentrated lines on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect. Although a mode in which the player pays attention to whether or not to temporarily stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 15-48 (A) to 15-48 as a modified example 193SG-1. As shown in (D), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (pseudo-continuous symbol moves toward the center of the image display device 5). ), The concentrated line may be moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can identify that the pseudo-continuous symbol may stop at the central portion of the image display device 5. Therefore, if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the game It is possible to make it easier for the person to recognize that the temporary stop was not performed.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED293SG034) is made to emit light is illustrated in the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-2, when a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. In the image display device 5, a concentrated line may be displayed in a color corresponding to the number of times the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. For example, the concentrated line is displayed in blue when the first temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the concentrated line is displayed in green when the second temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, and the concentrated line is displayed in red when the third temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. .. By doing so, when the second movable body 193SG033 is made to emit light as a temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is emitted in the same color as the concentrated line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect. The effect can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 193SG exemplifies a mode in which a cut-in notice effect and a group notice effect can be executed as a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit during the variable display, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-3, the display mode of the decorative symbol is changed or changed from, for example, the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It may be possible to execute an effect that changes the display direction.

In this way, when it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the decorative pattern or changing the direction of the variable display as a notice effect, the first variable display start count notification effect is "x2" or "x". When the display of "3" and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to recognize that the revariable display is executed by executing the advance notice effect.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 executes revariable display without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the player. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the visibility of the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is improved. A reduced visibility-inhibiting image (for example, an image of a blast) may be displayed, the visibility-inhibiting image may be hidden, and then revariable display may be executed. By doing so, the visibility-impaired image is displayed before the revariable display is executed, so that it is easy to understand that the revariable display is executed.

Further, a light guide plate which is a transparent plate material and can display the above-mentioned visibility-inhibiting image by injecting light from the outer peripheral side surface is provided on the front side (image display device) of the image display device 5 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be provided at a position) between 5 and the player. By doing so, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the visibility-inhibiting image is displayed on the light guide plate, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed on the image display device 5 is difficult for the player to see, and the player's The impression can be enhanced, and the effect of producing an image with impaired visibility can be enhanced.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is always moved and displayed downward of the image display device 5 and hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, it is simulated. A case may be provided in which the continuous symbols once start moving downward of the image display device 5 and then return to the central portion of the image display device 5 to temporarily stop. In this case, the movement speed of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the display image data switching timing and the movement of the pseudo-continuous symbol when returning to the central portion of the image display device 5 after passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 once. By making the speed different, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the pseudo-continuous symbol has passed the central portion of the image display device 5 or has once passed the central portion of the image display device 5. You may.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5, the display of the concentrated line may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo-continuous symbol once passes through the central portion of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice. Although the embodiment in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed is illustrated as in the case of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous effect is performed the maximum number of times during the variable display (if the feature unit 193SG is used). When executed (3 times), the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit is higher than the reach effect different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the reach effect of other super reach). High full rotation reach effect, etc.) may be executed. When the pseudo continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display in this way, the full rotation reach effect is executed without going through the revariable display notification effect after the temporary stop notification effect. good.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, as a pseudo-ream effect, a pseudo-ream symbol is displayed in the center (“middle” decorative symbol display area 5C) in a state where the symbols showing the same numerical value on the left and right decorative symbols are stopped (reach state). Although the form of temporary stop is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Further, as described above, as the pseudo-ream effect, a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-ream symbol may be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. As for the form in which a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5C of "middle" as a pseudo-continuous effect, an odd-numbered or even-numbered combination such as "135" or "246", "112" The decorative design may be temporarily stopped by a specific combination such as a combination of so-called misalignment such as "334" or "334".

(Explanation of Feature 225SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature portion 225SG (hereinafter, referred to as the present feature portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this feature unit 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion described above will be omitted.

The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) for the player.
A display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) suggesting that the specific image displayed on the display means is controlled to the advantageous state. The part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 14) and
With
The suggestion effect execution means
A pre-stage effect of moving and displaying the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 16-4 (C) to 16-4 (E))
As shown in FIGS. 16-4 (G) to 16-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisional, which is a successful mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the first stage effect is executed. The part to stop) and
After executing the first-stage effect, the second-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (F)), which is a failure mode in which the movement display of the specific image is continued, continues without temporarily stopping. The part that is moved and displayed and hidden) and can be executed,
It is a feature part.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to grasp the success and failure of the suggestion production, and the interest of the suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% are displayed with priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols. The part to be done)
In the first subsequent stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is once difficult to see (for example, shown in FIG. 16-4 (G)). (The part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with 0% transmittance is displayed),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (F), if the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect image for temporary stop notification is not displayed. part),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the semi-transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the previous stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed, and the specific image is stopped. Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize when the image is displayed, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort at the time of the stop display and emphasize that the stop display is performed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-5 as a modified example 225SG-1, a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has priority over a concentrated line. Displayed part),
When the first second stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is displayed when the first second stage effect is executed, so that the specific image is once difficult to see (for example, FIG. 16-6). As shown in (G), the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second subsequent stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (F), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the effect for temporary stop notification is not displayed. The part where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage effect in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed is stopped and displayed. Since it is difficult to see the image when it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort at the time of the stopped display and emphasize that the image is stopped and displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is
In the first stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-5 as a modified example 225SG-1, a decorative symbol or a pseudo-continuous symbol has priority over a concentrated line. Displayed part),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image even before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-7 (F) to 16-7 (H) as a modified example 225SG-2, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after it is hidden by the device 5),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage effect in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed is stopped and displayed. (2) Also in the latter stage production, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode to a predetermined period after the specific image is deleted.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% have priority over decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols. Displayed part),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image even before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 16-8 (F) to 16-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving the pseudo-continuous symbol. The part where the concentrated line is continuously displayed even after it is hidden by the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the semi-transparent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the pre-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed. Also in the second latter stage production, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode to a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is
In the first stage effect, a semi-transparent and highly transparent highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-1, concentrated lines having a transmittance of 50% are decorative patterns or pseudo-reams. The part that is displayed with priority over the design),
In the first subsequent stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transparency effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transparency effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16-9 as a modified example 225SG-4, the decorative symbol or the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed by displaying the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 20% on the image display device 5. The part that is difficult for the player to see),
In the second subsequent stage effect, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. Is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.
According to this feature, by displaying the highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the previous stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the moving display specific image is stopped and displayed, and the specific image is stopped. By displaying the low-transparency effect display when it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort at the time of the stop display and emphasize that the stop display is displayed, so that the interest of the subsequent production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is
The first second-stage effect includes an effect in which the size of the specific image is enlarged beyond the size in the first-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. If you do, the pseudo-continuous symbol after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 6, characterized in that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the stopped display specific image can be improved, and the stopped display can be further emphasized.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the pre-stage effect increases with the progress of the pre-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (C) to 16-4 (E), the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. The concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the above),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 7, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to raise the expectation that the specific image is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the previous stage production.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
It is provided with a notice effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 14) capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific event will occur.
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first second stage effect and the second second stage effect, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as a modification 225SG-5, an image display device as a temporary stop notification effect). When the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in 5, the part that restricts the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 8, characterized in that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestion effect execution means
As the suggestion effect, a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect) is displayed on the display means, and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the front stage effect and the above. The first suggestion effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect shown in FIG. 16-11 (C) as the modified example 225SG-5) and the display means have a smaller display dimension than the first specific image. A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) as an active display change suggestion effect) is displayed, and the first stage effect and the first second stage effect or the first stage effect and the first stage effect. 2 It is possible to execute the second suggestion effect (for example, the active display change suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 16-11 (D) to 16-11 (F) as the modified example 225SG-5) in which the latter stage effect is performed.
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the first suggestion effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 16-11 (B), in the image display device 5 A part that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% along with an image as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect),
When the first subsequent effect is executed as the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 16-11 (D) to 16-11 (F)). As shown in the above, the part in which the image of the arrow is displayed as the active display change notice effect in the image display device 5, but the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to any one of Form 2 to Form 9, characterized in that.
According to this feature, in the second suggestion effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed when the first subsequent effect is executed, so that the second specific image having a small display dimension can be understood by the effect display. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult.

First, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 (A) to 16-1 (C), FIGS. 16-2 (A) to 16-2 (C), and FIGS. 16-3 (A) to 16-3 (C). In addition, for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 16-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG, and FIG. 16-2 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Yes, FIG. 16-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image).

As shown in FIG. 16-1 (A), the image data 2 is obtained from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. It is the data drawn to display the concentrated line toward.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 (B), 16-2 (B), and 16-3 (A), the image data 3 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is data drawn to display the movement display from the upper side to the lower side. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 16-1 (B), the left and right of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop). The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b. As shown in FIG. 16-2 (B), the horizontal width dimension of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a), and the vertical width dimension is y. The data is drawn for display in (y> b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 replaces the pseudo-continuous symbol with the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in the feature unit 225SG) from the upper side to the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), the image data 4 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (C), the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 2 is changed to the image based on the image data 3 (from above to below the pseudo-continuous symbol). It is displayed with priority over (moving display toward). Since the concentrated line in the feature unit 225SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player can draw a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 (C) and 16-2 (D), the image based on the image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is the image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on (a pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). The effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the revariable display.

The transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 (C) and 16-2 (D), the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of the decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) Is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern image display device 5 downward).

In particular, in the feature unit 225SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 16-1 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop (see FIGS. 15-33 of the above-mentioned feature unit 193). The image data displayed in 1 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2) in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 16-3 does not temporarily stop.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 16-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (A) to 16-4 (C), after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display, the decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swing stops) and reaches. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". At this time, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (C) to 16-4 (E), in the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (G) and 16-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped by Since it is continuously moved and displayed downward of the display device 5 and then hidden, the player succeeds in producing the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) and fails in the effect (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ) Is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a concentrated line having a high transmittance, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol that is moving and displayed temporarily stops. You can improve your interest. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, since the left-right width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a) and the vertical width dimension is y (y> b)), the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved. The temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In the feature unit 225SG, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol is illustrated from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing for displaying the size of the pseudo-pseudo-continuous symbol larger than that before the temporary stop is after the temporary stop, such as the timing immediately before the temporary stop or the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and emphasizes that, for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by changing the shape and color of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (C) to 16-4 (E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. By moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is increased, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to raise the expectation for the movie and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In the feature unit 225SG, the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the concentrated lines is changed and the number of concentrated lines to be displayed is increased according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (increasing the density of the concentrated lines). ) By doing so, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the feature portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention, the present invention includes them. ..

For example, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIG. 16-1, the image display device 5 draws a concentrated line as the image data 2 and draws a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 3. An example of a form in which a concentrated line is displayed with priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 16-5 (A) to 16A as a modified example 225SG-1. As shown in −5 (C), by drawing the concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol with priority over the concentrated line (the concentrated line is displayed as a decorative symbol or the like). It may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A) to 16-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line in the image display device 5 is centered on the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the concentrated line makes it difficult for the player to see the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol. You can prevent that.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as an effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (G) and 16-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced and the temporary stop can be performed. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is hidden and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the image display device. Although the embodiment in which the image is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 16-7 (A) to 16-7 (FIGS. 16-7) to FIG. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device and hidden without being temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period up to the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modified example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, a temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-2, the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed with priority over the concentrated line during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 16-8 (A) to 16-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol during the temporary stop suggestion effect. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing so, as with the feature portion 225SG, by displaying the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Can improve the interest of. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily visually recognized. Although the impossible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. 16-9 (A) to 16-9 (C), a pseudo-continuous pattern is used. When is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image having a transmittance lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% or the like).

That is, as shown in FIG. 16-10, the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, during the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the concentrated line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (for example). , The above-mentioned 50%) allows the player to easily see the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line, while the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period (50%). In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% described above), so that the player can display the decorative symbol or pseudo in the period after the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern.

By doing so, as in the case of the feature portion 225SG, a concentrated line having a relatively high transmittance is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, which suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Can improve the interest of. Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 is used when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature unit 225SG. By displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of, the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped through the effect image for the temporary stop notification. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-ream pattern temporarily stopping.

Further, the feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as an effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect (see FIG. 15-29 in the feature unit 193SG) suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit may be executed. .. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the effect image for temporary stop notification on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. In some cases, by limiting the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

Further, as the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 16-11 as the modified example 225SG-5, for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the following Pseudo-ream suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the pseudo-ream suggestion effect, and variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F for displaying the hold storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display is provided, and an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display and the active display are displayed. It may be possible to execute an active display change notice effect that suggests that the display mode changes.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-11 (A) to 16-11 (C), the pseudo-ream symbol is used as the effect result of the temporary stop notice effect. Displays an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop, and a temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% in the image display device 5. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop. That is, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is started from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is visible to the player only by the effect image for the temporary stop notification. This is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-11 (A) and 16-11 (D) to 16-11 (F), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally used. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the stop timing, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right portion of the image display device 5 pierces the active display as shown in FIG. 16-11 (E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and when the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 16-11 (F), the image display device 5 It suffices that the arrow flying from the right part passes toward the left part of the image display device 5 without being stuck in the active display and then disappears.

As described above, in the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image for temporary stop notification together with the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect. When the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect while the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is once made invisible to the player, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) whose display size is shorter than the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect as the image of the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the effect image for temporary stop notification. It is possible to prevent the image from being obscured.

In the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop advance notice effect, and is simulated at the upper part of the image display device 5. An example is illustrated in which an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect at the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

(Explanation of Feature 225SG in Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, the feature portion 225SG (hereinafter, referred to as the present feature portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In this feature unit 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature portion described above will be omitted.

First, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, the image of the predetermined image is arranged by arranging other image data on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 (A) to 16-1 (C), FIGS. 16-2 (A) to 16-2 (C), and FIGS. 16-3 (A) to 16-3 (C). In addition, for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including the image data 1 to 4. Of these, FIG. 16-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG, and FIG. 16-2 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Yes, FIG. 16-3 is image data when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image).

As shown in FIG. 16-1 (A), the image data 2 is obtained from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 (“middle” decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. It is the data drawn to display the concentrated line toward.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 (B), 16-2 (B), and 16-3 (A), the image data 3 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol on the image display device 5 during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is data drawn to display the movement display from the upper side to the lower side. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 16-1 (B), the left and right of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the temporary stop). The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b. As shown in FIG. 16-2 (B), the horizontal width dimension of the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a), and the vertical width dimension is y. The data is drawn for display in (y> b)), and immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, the image display device 5 replaces the pseudo-continuous symbol with the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display a variable display of a normal decorative symbol (designs "1" to "9" in the feature unit 225SG) from the upper side to the lower side.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), the image data 4 is simulated from the central portion of the image display device 5 downward immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbol. This is data drawn to display the moving display of the continuous pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 16-1 to 16-3, display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5 are set in these image data 1 to 4. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. Further, the display priority of the image data 2 is set lower than that of the image data 1, and the display priority of the image data 3 is set lower than that of the image data 2. The display priority of the image data 4 is set to be the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3> image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is based on the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2 and the image data 3. It is displayed as an image below the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16-1 (C), the image (concentrated line) based on the image data 2 is changed to the image based on the image data 3 (from above to below the pseudo-continuous symbol). It is displayed with priority over (moving display toward). Since the concentrated line in the feature unit 225SG is set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), the player can draw a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 (C) and 16-2 (D), the image based on the image data 1 (effect image for temporary stop notification) is the image data 3. It is displayed with priority over the image based on (a pseudo-continuous pattern whose size is larger than that during the moving display due to the temporary stop). The effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the revariable display.

The transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification in the feature unit 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 16-2 (C) and 16-2 (D), the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time, these decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 16-3 (C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of the decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol). ) Is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the pseudo-continuous pattern image display device 5 downward).

In particular, in the feature unit 225SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 16-1 on the image display device 5, thereby performing a pseudo-ream. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbol is temporarily stopped.

Further, in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) temporarily stops the pseudo-continuous symbol regardless of whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops at the start timing of the variable display. The image data to be stopped is set and the variable display is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop (see FIGS. 15-33 of the above-mentioned feature unit 193). The image data displayed in 1 is switched from the image data (FIGS. 16-1 and 16-2) in which the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops to the image data in which the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 16-3 does not temporarily stop.

Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 16-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (A) to 16-4 (C), after a certain period of time has passed from the start of the variable display, the decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C. The symbol stops (swing stops) and reaches. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol moves from the upper side to the lower side in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the "middle". At this time, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (C) to 16-4 (E), in the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved toward the center of the image display device 5. Then, the concentrated line is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5.

Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (G) and 16-4 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and it is suggested that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggestion effect. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stopped by Since it is continuously moved and displayed downward of the display device 5 and then hidden, the player succeeds in producing the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol) and fails in the effect (the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop). ) Is easy to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

Further, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays a concentrated line having a high transmittance, so that the player pays attention to whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol that is moving and displayed temporarily stops. You can improve your interest. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop. At the same time, it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbol has been temporarily stopped, so that the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbol at the time of temporary stop is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, since the left-right width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x> a) and the vertical width dimension is y (y> b)), the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved and the pseudo-continuous symbol can be improved. The temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In the feature unit 225SG, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol is illustrated from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing for displaying the size of the pseudo-pseudo-continuous symbol larger than that before the temporary stop is after the temporary stop, such as the timing immediately before the temporary stop or the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden. It may be timing.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and emphasizes that, for example, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped by changing the shape and color of the pseudo-continuous symbol from the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIGS. 16-4 (C) to 16-4 (E), a concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is displayed. By moving and displaying the concentrated line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is increased, so that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. It is possible to raise the expectation for the movie and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In the feature unit 225SG, the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the color of the concentrated lines is changed and the number of concentrated lines to be displayed is increased according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect (increasing the density of the concentrated lines). ) By doing so, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the feature portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and even if there are changes or additions within the range not deviating from the gist of the present invention, the present invention includes them. ..

For example, in the feature unit 225SG, as shown in FIG. 16-1, the image display device 5 draws a concentrated line as the image data 2 and draws a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 3. An example of a form in which a concentrated line is displayed with priority over a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 16-5 (A) to 16A as a modified example 225SG-1. As shown in −5 (C), by drawing the concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol with priority over the concentrated line (the concentrated line is displayed as a decorative symbol or the like). It may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo-continuous pattern).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (A) to 16-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line in the image display device 5 is centered on the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, and the concentrated line makes it difficult for the player to see the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol. You can prevent that.

When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as an effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, as shown in FIG. 16-6 (F). The concentrated line is hidden, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device without being temporarily stopped and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-6 (G) and 16-6 (H), the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. An effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player can use the effect for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol. The pseudo-continuous pattern is invisible due to the image. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, the player can visually recognize the pseudo-continuous symbol having a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect by hiding the effect image for the temporary stop notification. It will be possible.

As described above, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced and the temporary stop can be performed. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo-ream pattern.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line is hidden and then the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped in the image display device. Although the embodiment in which the image is continuously moved downward and hidden is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 16-7 (A) to 16-7 (FIGS. 16-7) to FIG. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the effect of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbol is continuously moved downward of the image display device and hidden without being temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period up to the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modified example 225SG-1, by displaying the concentrated line as an image on the rear side of the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol, a temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-2, the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol are displayed with priority over the concentrated line during the temporary stop suggestion effect, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the concentrated line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5 is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 16-8 (A) to 16-8 (H) as a modified example 225SG-3, the concentrated line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the pseudo-continuous symbol during the temporary stop suggestion effect. If the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentrated line may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. good.

By doing so, as with the feature portion 225SG, by displaying the decorative symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol as an image on the rear side of the concentrated line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped. Can improve the interest of. When the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol is also displayed by continuously displaying the concentrated line for a predetermined period after the pseudo-continuous symbol is hidden in the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the interest in whether or not to temporarily stop. Although not particularly shown, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for stop notification, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the feature unit 225SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily visually recognized. Although the impossible form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-4, as shown in FIGS. 16-9 (A) to 16-9 (C), a pseudo-continuous pattern is used. When is temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image having a transmittance lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% or the like).

That is, as shown in FIG. 16-10, the transmittance of the concentrated line is high (for example, during the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the concentrated line is displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect (for example). , The above-mentioned 50%) allows the player to easily see the decorative pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern through the concentrated line, while the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period (50%). In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% described above), so that the player can display the decorative symbol or pseudo in the period after the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern. Although not particularly shown in this modification 225SG-4, when the pseudo-continuous symbol does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 notifies the temporary stop as in the case of other feature portions and modification examples. The effect image for is not displayed.

By doing so, as in the case of the feature portion 225SG, a concentrated line having a relatively high transmittance is displayed during the temporary stop suggestion effect, which suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. Can improve the interest of. Then, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 is used when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as in the feature unit 225SG. By displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of, the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped through the effect image for the temporary stop notification. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-ream pattern temporarily stopping.

Further, the feature unit 225SG exemplifies a mode in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as an effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 225SG-5, a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect during the variable display (see FIG. 15-29 in the feature unit 193SG). ) May be executable. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentrated line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the effect image for temporary stop notification on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5. In some cases, by limiting the execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the advance notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and the interest of the notice effect from being lowered.

Further, as the advance notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 16-11 as the modified example 225SG-5, for example, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped as the effect result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the following Pseudo-ream suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the pseudo-ream suggestion effect, and variable display being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F for displaying the hold storage display corresponding to the active display as an active display is provided, and an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the display mode of the active display and the active display are displayed. It may be possible to execute an active display change notice effect that suggests that the display mode changes.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 16-11 (A) to 16-11 (C), the pseudo-ream symbol is used as the effect result of the temporary stop notice effect. Displays an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the temporary stop, and a temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% in the image display device 5. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed, and the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period elapses from the temporary stop. That is, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is started from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is visible to the player only by the effect image for the temporary stop notification. This is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 16-11 (A) and 16-11 (D) to 16-11 (F), the pseudo-continuous symbol is provisionally used. The effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 from the stop timing, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F). An image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1> L2) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, an arrow flying from the right portion of the image display device 5 pierces the active display as shown in FIG. 16-11 (E). As a result, the display mode of the active display changes, and when the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the effect of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 16-11 (F), the image display device 5 It suffices that the arrow flying from the right part passes toward the left part of the image display device 5 without being stuck in the active display and then disappears.

As described above, in the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image for temporary stop notification together with the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect. When the active display change notice effect is executed as the notice effect while the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is once made invisible to the player, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying an image (arrow image) whose display size is shorter than the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect as the image of the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the effect image for temporary stop notification. It is possible to prevent the image from being obscured.

In the present modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-ream suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped as a result of the effect of the temporary stop advance notice effect, and is simulated at the upper part of the image display device 5. An example is illustrated in which an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect at the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). An effect image for temporary stop notification (20% or 50%) may be displayed.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of the plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. Although the form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by changing the display mode of the hold storage display or the display mode at the end timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a hold memory display change effect that suggests that the variable display result corresponding to the hold memory display is a big hit, and as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. , A case may be provided in which the symbol indicating that the hold storage display is changed (hold memory display change notification symbol) is stopped in the image display device 5. When the hold memory display change notification symbol is stopped in the image display device 5 in this way, the temporary stop suggestion in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG is targeted for whether or not the hold memory display change notification symbol is stopped. An effect corresponding to the effect (suggested effect in the present invention) may be made feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that the pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of the plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. The form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of images can be displayed as a background image in the image display device 5 and displayed. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result being executed to be a big hit according to the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. A case may be provided in which the symbol (background image change notification symbol) indicating that the image is to be stopped is stopped in the image display device 5. When the background image change notification symbol is stopped in the image display device 5 in this way, it is used as a temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, depending on whether or not the background image change notification symbol is stopped. The corresponding effect (suggested effect in the present invention) may be feasible.

Further, in the feature unit 193SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

Further, in the present specification, a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are illustrated as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention, but the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. Alternatively, only one feature portion or modification may be carried out.

For example, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a symbol (pseudo-ream) for notifying that a pseudo-ream effect is executed as one of a plurality of decorative symbols or as a symbol different from the decorative symbol. The form in which the symbol) is temporarily stopped in the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set by a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbol). An effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) corresponding to the temporary stop suggestion effect in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG is executed for the stop of the symbol that can be suggested and suggests that a specific set value is set. It may be possible.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information including specific effect identification information, derive and display the display result, and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means that can control the progress of the game,
An effect control means capable of controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means,
Predetermined when the number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period that has never been controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number of times. An update means that can update numerical data from the first value to the second value,
When the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, the adjusting means for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is given decreases, and
With
The game control means can transmit control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value.
The update means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the end condition is satisfied.
Moreover,
As a variable display, a specific effect capable of executing a specific effect that temporarily stops the specific effect identification information and then resumes the variable display at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result. Directing execution means and
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect identification information has been temporarily stopped, and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means temporarily reduces the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the first low visibility. It is possible to perform an effect that lowers the visibility to the second low visibility state, which is even lower than the state.
As the notification effect, the notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information invisible.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the specific effect identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Can be displayed continuously,
A gaming machine characterized by that. It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display of multiple types of effect identification information, derive and display the display results, and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A game control means that can control the progress of the game,
An effect control means capable of controlling the effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means,
Predetermined when the number of times of the advantageous state that has occurred in the advantageous period that has never been controlled from the normal state to the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number of times. An update means that can update numerical data from the first value to the second value,
When the predetermined numerical value data is the second value, the adjusting means for adjusting so that the speed at which the game value given in the unit period is given decreases, and
With
The game control means can transmit control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the effect control means.
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can identify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value.
The update means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the end condition is satisfied.
Moreover,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information to the derivation display of the display result, the special identification information different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped and then the variable display is restarted. Specific production execution means that can execute production,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the special identification information is temporarily stopped, and
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special identification information has been temporarily stopped, and
With
As the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect execution means once reduces the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying the effect display, and then the visibility is further improved as compared with the first low visibility state. It is possible to perform the effect of lowering to the low second low visibility state.
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect of making the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect even when the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, and if the special identification information is not temporarily stopped, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed. Can be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images